Yamaha Stereo Receiver HTR 5940 User Manual
U
HTR-5940  
AV Receiver  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
d) If the product does not operate normally by following  
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls  
that are covered by the operating instructions as an  
improper adjustment of other controls may result in  
damage and will often require extensive work by a  
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal  
operation,  
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or  
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna  
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some  
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.  
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,  
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the  
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire  
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,  
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding  
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.  
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any  
way, and  
f)  
When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-  
mance - this indicates a need for service.  
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING  
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,  
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer or have the same  
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized  
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other  
hazards.  
ANTENNA  
LEAD IN  
WIRE  
MAST  
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to  
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety  
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating  
condition.  
GROUND  
CLAMP  
ANTENNA  
DISCHARGE UNIT  
(NEC SECTION 810–20)  
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – This unit should be mounted  
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat  
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other  
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
ELECTRIC  
SERVICE  
EQUIPMENT  
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS  
(NEC SECTION 810–21)  
GROUND CLAMPS  
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING  
ELECTRODE SYSTEM  
(NEC ART 250. PART H)  
Note to CATV system installer:  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s  
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides  
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies  
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding  
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as  
practical.  
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE  
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)  
1
IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS  
UNIT!  
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that  
interference will not occur in all installations. If this  
product is found to be the source of interference, which  
can be determined by turning this unit “OFF” and “ON”,  
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the  
following measures:  
This product, when installed as indicated in the  
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC  
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by  
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to  
use the product.  
IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to  
accessories and/or another product use only high quality  
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST  
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to  
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to  
use this product in the USA.  
NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply  
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15  
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these  
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that  
your use of this product in a residential environment will  
not result in harmful interference with other electronic  
devices.  
Relocate either this product or the device that is being  
affected by the interference.  
2
3
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit  
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.  
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient  
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,  
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.  
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory  
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to  
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the  
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics  
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA  
90620.  
The above statements apply ONLY to those products  
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its  
subsidiaries.  
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if  
not installed and used according to the instructions found  
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the  
operation of other electronic devices.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.  
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.  
1
2
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual  
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.  
Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean  
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,  
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at  
least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20  
cm on the back of this unit.  
Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,  
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.  
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from  
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with  
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent  
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical  
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.  
Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto  
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping  
or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:  
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified  
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.  
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.  
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time  
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall  
outlet.  
16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power  
cable plug can be reached easily.  
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on  
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is  
faulty.  
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this  
unit in the standby mode, and then disconnect the power  
cable from the AC wall outlet.  
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)  
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit  
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging  
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:  
3
4
5
–
–
–
Other components, as they may cause damage and/or  
discoloration on the surface of this unit.  
Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,  
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.  
Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and  
liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or  
damage to this unit.  
WARNING  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN  
OR MOISTURE.  
6
Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,  
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature  
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,  
and/or personal injury.  
Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections  
are complete.  
Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,  
possibly causing damage.  
Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.  
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power  
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even  
if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is  
designed to consume a very small quantity of power.  
7
8
9
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS  
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to  
wide slot and fully insert.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,  
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.  
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might  
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.  
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this  
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and  
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.  
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage  
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than  
specified.  
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and  
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit  
during a lightning storm.  
IMPORTANT  
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space  
below.  
MODEL:  
Serial No.:  
The serial number is located on the rear panel of this  
unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for  
future reference.  
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime  
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your  
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or  
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries  
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND.....................40  
INTRODUCTION  
Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround........... 40  
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 41  
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 42  
RECORDING........................................................43  
FM/AM TUNING..................................................44  
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 44  
Manual tuning.......................................................... 45  
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 46  
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 47  
Selecting preset stations........................................... 48  
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 49  
FEATURES............................................................. 2  
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3  
Supplied accessories.................................................. 3  
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4  
Front panel................................................................. 4  
Remote control........................................................... 6  
Front panel display .................................................... 9  
Rear panel................................................................ 11  
®
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING.................51  
Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play  
digital antenna accessory..................................... 51  
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 52  
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 53  
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 54  
Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode ....... 55  
Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 59  
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 60  
PREPARATION  
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12  
Placing speakers....................................................... 12  
Connecting speakers................................................ 13  
Information on jacks and cable plugs...................... 16  
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17  
Connecting a TV...................................................... 18  
Connecting a DVD player,  
a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB..................... 19  
Connecting a CD player, an MD player  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
or a tape deck....................................................... 21  
Connecting a multi-format player  
or an external decoder ......................................... 22  
Connecting a game console,  
a video camera or a portable audio player........... 22  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 23  
Connecting the power cable..................................... 24  
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 25  
Turning on this unit or setting it  
to the standby mode............................................. 26  
BASIC SETUP...................................................... 27  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................62  
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 62  
Sound field program descriptions............................ 63  
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 65  
Sound field program speaker layouts ...................... 71  
ADVANCED OPERATION  
SET MENU............................................................74  
Using SET MENU................................................... 76  
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 78  
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 81  
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 83  
ADVANCED SETUP............................................84  
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................86  
Controlling this unit, a TV,  
or other components ............................................ 86  
Setting remote control codes ................................... 88  
Setting library codes ................................................ 89  
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 90  
RESETTING THE SYSTEM...............................91  
BASIC OPERATION  
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30  
USING OTHER FEATURES.............................. 32  
Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 32  
Muting the audio output........................................... 32  
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 32  
Selecting the input mode ......................................... 33  
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 34  
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 35  
Selecting the Compressed Music  
Enhancer mode.................................................... 36  
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 37  
Enjoying multi-channel sources  
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION  
in 2-channel stereo............................................... 37  
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 37  
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 38  
Displaying the input source information ................. 38  
Playing video sources in the background ................ 39  
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................92  
GLOSSARY...........................................................97  
Audio information ................................................... 97  
Video information.................................................... 98  
Sound field program information ............................ 99  
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................100  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FEATURES  
FEATURES  
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier  
◆ Minimum RMS output power  
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)  
Front: 90 W + 90 W  
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)  
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM  
Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory” sold  
separately)  
Center: 90 W  
Surround: 90 W + 90 W  
Surround back: 90 W  
◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround  
sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in  
multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound  
experience  
Sound field features  
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of  
sound fields  
Other features  
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter  
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder  
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,  
DTS 96/24 decoder  
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder  
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input  
◆ S-video signal input/output capability  
◆ Component video input/output capability  
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR  
OUT)  
◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models  
only)  
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks  
◆ Sleep timer  
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP  
◆ SILENT CINEMA  
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes  
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes,  
backlighting input selector buttons  
◆ PORTABLE mini analog input jack on the front panel  
for a portable audio player  
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the  
sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the  
MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo  
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner  
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning  
◆ Automatic preset tuning  
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)  
Notes  
• yindicates a tip for your operation.  
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button  
names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.  
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In  
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.  
“
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
CORPORATION.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks  
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital  
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM  
Satellite Radio Inc.  
Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved.  
Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned  
by Neural Audio Corporation.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING STARTED  
GETTING STARTED  
Supplied accessories  
Check that you received all of the following parts.  
Remote control  
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna  
adapter (U.K. model only)  
Batteries (2)  
(AA, R6, UM-3)  
AM loop antenna  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
Indoor FM antenna  
(U.K., Europe, Australia  
and Korea models)  
Indoor FM antenna  
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia  
and General models)  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
DISC SKIP  
Installing batteries in the remote control  
Notes  
1
3
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following  
conditions:  
– The operation range of the remote control decreases.  
– The TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes  
dim.  
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.  
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and  
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as  
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and  
color.  
2
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid  
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with  
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before  
installing new batteries.  
1
2
Take off the battery compartment cover.  
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose  
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.  
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2  
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,  
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory  
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code  
and program any acquired functions that may have been  
cleared.  
Insert the two supplied batteries  
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity  
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the  
battery compartment.  
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back  
into place.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
Front panel  
Note  
The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH  
l
/
h,  
MEMORY, and DISPLAY) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when “XM” is selected as the input source.  
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 52.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 8  
9
0
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
CATEGORY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
(U.S.A. model)  
B
A
C D  
E
F
G
H
I
J
1 STANDBY/ON  
5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT  
Turns on this unit or set it to the standby mode  
(see page 26).  
•
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when  
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 44).  
Selects the speaker channel whose output level you  
want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the  
input source (see page 35).  
•
Notes  
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of  
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote  
control.  
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay  
before this unit can reproduce sound.  
6 PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ h, LEVEL +/–  
buttons  
•
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)  
when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The  
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display  
(see page 48).  
2 Remote control sensor  
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).  
•
•
Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is  
selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not  
displayed in the front panel display (see page 45).  
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using  
NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input  
source (see page 35).  
3 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT  
•
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH  
l
/
h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the  
tuning frequency.  
•
Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 49).  
4 FM/AM  
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)  
Switches the reception band between FM and AM when  
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 44).  
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this  
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset  
tuning (see page 46).  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
8 Front panel display  
I MULTI CH INPUT  
Shows information about the operational status of this unit  
(see page 9).  
Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks (see page 37).  
9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)  
Note  
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator  
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is  
turned off) (see page 44).  
The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes  
priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the  
front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).  
0 VOLUME  
Controls the output level of all audio channels.  
J VIDEO AUX jacks  
Input audio and video signals from a portable external  
source such as a game console, a video camera or a  
portable audio player (see page 22).  
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.  
y
A
PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack  
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select  
“V-AUX” as the input source.  
Outputs audio signals for private listening with  
headphones (see page 32).  
Note  
Notes  
The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority  
over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.  
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the  
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.  
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the  
left and right headphone channels.  
B SPEAKERS A/B buttons  
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A  
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the  
corresponding button is pressed.  
C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)  
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When  
“STRAIGHT” is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel  
input signals are output directly from their respective  
speakers without effect processing (see page 37).  
D TONE CONTROL  
Selects “BASS” or “TREBLE” to adjust the total balance  
of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with the  
BASS/TREBLE +/– buttons (see page 31).  
E BASS/TREBLE +/– buttons  
Adjust the bass/treble balance of the front left and right  
speakers in conjunction with TONE CONTROL  
(see page 31).  
F PROGRAM l/ hbuttons  
Selects sound field programs (see page 62).  
G INPUT MODE  
Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or  
sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input  
signals and select the corresponding input signals when  
one component is connected via both digital and analog  
connections (see page 33).  
H INPUT selector  
Selects the desired input source.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
Remote control  
This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other  
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 86.  
t
Notes  
• The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH MODE, DISPLAY, cursor  
buttons u/ d/ j/ i, numeric buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when “XM” is  
selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 52.  
• The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the  
component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press TUNER to select the “TUNER” as the input source.  
■ Controlling this unit  
1
2
0
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this  
unit.  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
A
B
1 Infrared window  
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the  
component you want to operate (see page 8).  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
C
D
2 CODE SET  
Use to set up remote control codes (see page 88).  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
TUNER  
3
3 Input selector buttons  
V-AUX  
DVR  
Select the input source.  
E
F
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
Note  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected  
input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press  
any buttons on the remote control, showing which source  
component is currently being operated.  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
G
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
4 Sound field program selector buttons  
Select sound field programs (see page 62).  
– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in  
surround (see page 41).  
– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-  
channel playback of multi-channel sources (see  
page 40).  
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
5
6
9
0
10  
ENT.  
H
I
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
SET MENU  
MENU  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
7
8
9
J
SRCH MODE  
– Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in  
hi-fi stereo sound (see page 38).  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
5 SPEAKERS  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the  
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this  
button repeatedly to toggle as follows:  
AUDIO  
DISC SKIP  
A on  
B on  
A and B off  
6 ENHANCER  
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode  
(see page 36).  
7 LEVEL  
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted (see page 35).  
(U.S.A. model)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
8 Cursor buttons u/ d/ j/ i, ENTER  
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or  
the “SET MENU” parameters.  
F Component selector switch  
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons  
in the shaded area.  
AMP  
9 RETURN  
Operates this unit.  
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the  
“SET MENU” parameters.  
SOURCE  
0 TRANSMIT indicator  
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared  
signals.  
Operates the component selected with an input  
selector button (see page 87).  
TV  
A STANDBY  
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 26).  
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or  
(see page 86).  
B POWER  
Notes  
Turns on this unit (see page 26).  
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see  
page 88.  
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and  
C SLEEP  
Sets the sleep timer (see page 34).  
(see page 87), priority is given to the one set for DTV/  
CBL.  
D MULTI CH IN  
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external  
decoder, etc. (see page 37).  
G MUTE  
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio  
output to the previous volume level (see page 32).  
E VOLUME +/–  
H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)  
Increases or decreases the volume level.  
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When  
“STRAIGHT” is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel  
input signals are output directly from their respective  
speakers without effect processing (see page 37).  
I NIGHT  
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 32).  
J SET MENU  
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 76).  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
■ Controlling the TUNER functions  
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then  
press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.  
■ Using the remote control  
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.  
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote  
control sensor on the main unit during operation.  
4 Numeric buttons  
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations.  
(U.S.A. model)  
7 BAND  
VOLUME  
Switches the reception band between FM and AM  
(see page 44).  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PREET/TUNING  
SEARCH MO
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
CATEGORY  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
AIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
ECT  
TONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
8 A–ECAT. j/ i, PRESET/CH u/ d  
Press A–ECAT. j/ ito select a preset station group  
(A to E) and PRESET/CH u/ dto select a preset station  
number (1 to 8) (see page 48).  
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)  
30  
30  
C
O
D
E
S
E
T
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
M
U
L
T
I
C
H
I
N
DVD  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
AMP  
SOURCE  
T
V
V
O
L
T
V
C
H
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV  
T
V
M
U
T
E
T
V
I
N
P
U
T
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
S
T
A
N
D
A
R
D
S
E
L
E
C
T
E
X
T
D
S
U
R
.
D
I
R
E
C
T
S
T
.
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
ENT  
9
0
.
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
Notes  
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.  
• Do not drop the remote control.  
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types  
of conditions:  
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath  
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove  
– places of extremely low temperatures  
– dusty places  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
Front panel display  
Note  
The XM is only applicable to the U.S.A. model and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as  
the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 54.  
1
2 3  
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
96  
24  
t
VOLUME  
dB  
AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY  
PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP  
MATRIX DISCRETE  
ENHANCER  
VIRTUAL  
STANDARD  
SILENT CINEMA  
NIGHT  
SP  
HiFi DSP  
A B  
MUTE  
96/24  
LFE  
L C R  
q EX qDIGITAL  
q PL x q PL  
PCM  
ft  
q PL  
mS  
dB  
SL SB SR  
neural  
C
D
F
G
H
I
J
K L  
M
N
E
(U.K. and Europe models only)  
O
1 Decoder indicators  
7 CINEMA DSP indicator  
The respective indicator lights up when any of the  
decoders of this unit function.  
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field  
program (see page 63).  
8 AUTO indicator  
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode  
(see page 44).  
Note  
The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada  
models and lights up only when the Neural Surround decoder is  
selected (see pages 41).  
9 TUNED indicator  
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station  
(see page 44).  
2 ENHANCER indicator  
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is  
turned on (see page 36).  
0 STEREO indicator  
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an  
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit  
(see page 44).  
3 Sound field indicators  
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.  
Presence DSP sound field  
Listening position  
A MEMORY indicator  
Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 46).  
Surround left  
Surround right  
B VOLUME level indicator  
Indicates the current volume level.  
DSP sound field  
DSP sound field  
Surround back DSP sound field  
C PCM indicator  
4 VIRTUAL indicator  
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see  
page 42).  
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code  
Modulation) digital audio signals.  
D STANDARD indicator  
5 Input source indicators  
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently  
selected input source.  
Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or  
“SUR. ENHANCED” programs are selected (see  
page 41).  
6 SILENT CINEMA indicator  
E SP A B indicators  
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound  
field program is selected (see page 32).  
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
F Headphones indicator  
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 32).  
G NIGHT indicator  
Lights up when you select a night listening mode  
(see page 32).  
H HiFi DSP indicator  
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field  
program (see page 63).  
I Multi-information display  
Shows the name of the current sound field program and  
other information when adjusting or changing settings.  
J SLEEP indicator  
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 34).  
K MUTE indicator  
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 32).  
L 96/24 indicator  
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.  
M Input channel indicators  
Indicate the channel components of the current digital  
input signal (see page 28).  
N LFE indicator  
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.  
O Radio Data System indicators  
(U.K. and Europe models only)  
Lights up when the Radio Data System data is being  
received.  
EON  
Lights up when the EON data service is being  
received.  
PTY HOLD  
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System  
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS  
Rear panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
XM  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
MULTI CH INPUT  
OUTPUT  
DIGITAL INPUT  
CENTER  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVD  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
DVD  
PB  
DVR  
PB  
Y
PR  
Y
PR  
MD/  
CD-R  
SUB  
WOOFER  
IN  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
SUB  
WOOFER  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
SURROUND  
CD  
FRONT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
VIDEO  
TUNER  
DVR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
DTV/CBL  
DVR  
S VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DTV/CBL  
MONITOR OUT  
SPEAKERS  
AC OUTLETS  
FM ANT  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
AM  
ANT  
75Ω  
GND  
UNBAL.  
A
B
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
(U.S.A. model)  
8
9
0
1 Video component jacks  
7 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks  
See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.  
See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.  
2 Audio component jacks  
8 Antenna terminals  
See page 21 for connection information.  
See page 23 for connection information.  
3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks  
9 Speaker terminals  
See page 22 for connection information.  
See page 13 for connection information.  
4 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack  
0 AC OUTLET(S)  
See page 14 for connection information.  
Use to supply power to your other audiovisual  
components.  
See page 24 for details.  
5 DIGITAL INPUT jacks  
See page 19 for connection information.  
6 XM jack (U.S.A. model only)  
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
(Asia and General models only)  
See page 24 for details.  
See page 51 for connection information.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
CONNECTIONS  
Placing speakers  
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R  
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and  
multi-channel audio sources.  
*
Front speakers (FL and FR)  
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus  
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance  
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each  
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the  
same.  
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU  
(International Telecommunication Union).  
Center speaker (C)  
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds  
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical  
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,  
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the  
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as  
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or  
under it.  
FL  
FR  
C
30˚  
SL  
SL  
SR  
SR  
60˚  
Surround speakers (SL and SR)  
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround  
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening  
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above  
the floor.  
80˚  
SB  
Surround back speaker (SB)  
The surround back speaker supplements the surround  
speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back  
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening  
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.  
FR  
SL  
SW  
FL  
SR  
Subwoofer (SW)  
C
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as  
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer  
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass  
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for hi-fi  
stereo reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect)  
channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The  
position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low  
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to  
place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it  
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall  
reflections.  
SB  
1.8 m (6 ft)  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting speakers  
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,  
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be  
unnatural and lack bass.  
CAUTION  
•
•
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is in the standby mode (see page 26).  
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this  
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.  
•
•
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the  
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.  
If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit  
(see page 25).  
Notes  
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a  
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the  
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.  
• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79)  
are directed to the speakers selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 79).  
Front speakers (A)  
Right  
Left  
Surround speakers  
Subwoofer  
Right  
Left  
1
2
4
5
7
OUTPUT  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
SURROUND  
A
B
CLASS 2 WIRING  
CENTER  
SURROUND BACK  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
6
Front  
speakers  
(B)  
Center  
speaker  
Surround back  
speaker  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONNECTIONS  
FRONT terminals  
Connect one or two front speaker systems (1, 2) to these  
terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,  
connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.  
CENTER terminals  
1
5
Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.  
7
4
SURROUND terminals  
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.  
2
3
SURROUND BACK terminals  
Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.  
6
SUBWOOFER jack  
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as  
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer  
System) to this jack.  
Speaker layout  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTIONS  
■ Connecting the speaker cable  
■ Connecting the banana plug  
(except U.K., Europe and Asia models)  
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector  
widely used to terminate speaker cables.  
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of  
insulation from the end of each speaker  
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the  
cable together to prevent short circuits.  
Banana plug  
10 mm (0.4 in)  
1
2
Tighten the knob.  
2
Loosen the knob.  
Insert the banana plug connector into the  
end of the corresponding terminal.  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side  
of each terminal.  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Information on jacks and cable plugs  
Audio jacks and cables  
Video jacks and cables  
AUDIO  
PORTABLE  
DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
L
R
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
Y
PB  
PR  
(White)  
(Red)  
(Orange)  
(Yellow)  
(Green)  
(Blue) (Red)  
S
O
V
PB  
PR  
Y
L
R
C
M
Left and right  
analog audio  
cable plug  
Stereo  
analog  
audio  
minicable  
plug  
Coaxial  
digital  
audiocable audio cable  
plug plug  
Optical  
digital  
Composite  
video cable  
plug  
S-video  
cable plug  
Component  
video cable  
plug  
■ Audio jacks  
■ Video jacks  
This unit has four types of audio jacks. Connection  
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other  
components.  
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection  
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video  
monitor.  
AUDIO jacks  
VIDEO jacks  
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left  
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the  
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.  
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via  
composite video cables.  
S VIDEO jacks  
PORTABLE jack  
For analog audio signals transmitted via stereo analog  
audio mini cables.  
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and  
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate  
wires of S-video cables.  
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks  
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital  
audio cables.  
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks  
For component video signals, separated into the  
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals  
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.  
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks  
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital  
audio cables.  
Notes  
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and  
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the  
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals  
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are  
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.  
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the  
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not  
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This  
cap protects the jack from dust.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
P
Audio and video signal flow  
■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)  
Input  
Output  
AUDIO OUT (REC)  
L
R
L
R
Analog audio  
AUDIO  
PORTABLE  
Analog output  
Note  
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog  
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.  
■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT  
Output  
(MONITOR OUT)  
Input  
Y
P
B
PR  
Y
PB  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
Analog video  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
Through  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting a TV  
Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.  
CAUTION  
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between  
components are complete.  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Y
PB  
PR  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
S
(U.S.A. model)  
S-video in  
V
Y
PB  
PR  
Video in  
Component video in  
TV  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB  
Connect your DVD player, DVD player, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those  
made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.  
CAUTION  
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between  
components are complete.  
Notes  
• Be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV  
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks.  
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the  
corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “INPUT ASSIGN” (see page 81).  
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is  
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack  
■ Connecting a DVD player  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL INPUT  
DVD  
DVD  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PR  
DVD  
PB  
Y
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
DVD  
DVD  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(U.S.A. model)  
S
Y
PB  
V
PR  
O
R
L
C
Optical audio out  
S-Video out  
Audio out  
Coaxial audio out  
Component video out  
Video out  
DVD Player  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTIONS  
■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR  
AUDIO  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
Y
DVR  
PB  
PR  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
DVR  
DVR  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
(U.S.A. model)  
S
S
V
V
Y
PB  
PR  
R
L
R
L
S-video out  
S-video in  
Audio in  
Video in  
Video out  
Audio out  
Component video out  
DVD recorder or  
VCR  
■ Connecting an STB  
Cable TV receiver or  
satellite receiver  
Audio out  
Component video out  
Video out  
Optical audio out  
S-video out  
R
L
O
V
Y
PB  
PR  
S
AUDIO  
DIGITAL INPUT  
DTV/CBL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
PR  
Y
PB  
OPTICAL  
DTV/CBL  
VIDEO  
DTV/CBL  
DTV/CBL  
S VIDEO  
(U.S.A. model)  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck  
Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog connection.  
CAUTION  
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between  
components are complete.  
Note  
To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT jack, select the  
corresponding setting for “OPTICAL IN” or “COAXIAL IN” in “INPUT ASSIGN” (see page 81).  
CD Player  
Audio out  
R
L
AUDIO  
DIGITAL INPUT  
DTV/CBL DVD  
DVD  
MD/  
CD-R  
IN  
(PLAY)  
OUT  
(REC)  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
CD  
(U.S.A. model)  
R
L
R
L
Audio in  
Audio out  
MD recorder or  
tape deck  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting a multi-format player  
or an external decoder  
Connecting a game console,  
a video camera or a portable audio  
player  
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a  
game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to  
this unit.  
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks  
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and  
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a  
multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or  
pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-  
format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output  
jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and  
surround channels.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and  
other components before making connections.  
CAUTION  
Note  
The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority  
over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.  
Do not connect this unit or other components to  
the AC power supply until all connections  
between components are complete.  
(U.S.A. model)  
VOLUME  
Notes  
STANDBY  
/ON  
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 37), this unit  
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and  
you cannot select sound field programs.  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We  
recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker  
system before using this feature.  
VIDEO AUX  
M
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the  
front left and right channels.  
V
L
R
Audio  
out  
Video out  
Audio out  
MULTI CH INPUT  
CENTER  
Game console or  
video camera  
Portable audio  
player  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SURROUND  
FRONT  
L
R
L
R
Front out  
Surround  
out  
Subwoofer  
out  
Center  
out  
Multi-format player or  
external decoder  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas  
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this  
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient  
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to  
designated terminals.  
2
3
Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT  
terminal.  
Notes  
• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General  
models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area  
(see page 85).  
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.  
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an  
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.  
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception  
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,  
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized  
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.  
Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires  
into the AM ANT terminal.  
AM loop antenna  
(supplied)  
Indoor FM antenna  
(supplied)  
4
5
Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back  
into place.  
(U.S.A. model)  
TUNER  
FM ANT  
AM  
ANT  
75Ω  
GND  
UNBAL.  
Ground  
For maximum safety and  
minimum interference,  
connect the antenna GND  
terminal to a good earth  
ground. A good earth  
Outdoor AM antenna  
Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) of  
vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors  
from a window.  
ground is a metal stake  
driven into moist earth.  
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the  
other lead wire to the GND terminal.  
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna  
Set up the AM loop antenna.  
y
1
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to  
this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception  
when you tune into AM stations (see page 44).  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CONNECTIONS  
Connecting the power cable  
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.  
(U.S.A. model)  
AC OUTLETS  
To the AC wall outlet  
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)  
CAUTION  
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet  
Korea model............................................................... None  
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets  
VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
(Asia and General models only)  
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected  
components. Connect the power cable of your other  
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is  
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to  
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is in the standby  
mode or the power cable of this unit is disconnected from  
the AC wall outlet. For information on the maximum  
power or the total power consumption of the components  
that can be connected to these outlet(s), see  
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit  
must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the  
power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of  
the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this  
unit and create a potential fire hazard.  
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or  
counterclockwise to the correct position using a  
straight slot screwdriver.  
Voltages are as follows:  
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 100.  
Asia model ......................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
General model .....110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
Memory back-up  
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data  
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.  
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power  
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the  
power supply is cut off for more than one week.  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
230-  
Voltage indication  
240V  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONNECTIONS  
Setting the speaker impedance  
CAUTION  
3
Press PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front  
panel to select “SP IMP.”.  
The following display appears in the front panel  
display.  
If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set “SP  
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this  
unit.  
l
PROGRAM  
h
(U.S.A. model)  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
SP IMP.-8 MIN  
4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front  
panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.  
The following display appears in the front panel  
display.  
2,5  
1
3
2,4  
Make sure this unit is set to the standby  
mode.  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
See page 26 for details about turning on this unit or  
standby mode.  
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the  
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to  
turn on this unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
SP IMP.-6 MIN  
While holding  
down  
5
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
save the new setting and set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
STRAIGHT  
STANDBY  
/ON  
EFFECT  
STANDBY  
/ON  
Note  
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CONNECTIONS  
Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode  
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.  
S
STANDBY/ON  
(U.S.A. model)  
(U.S.A. model)  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
STANDBY  
POWER  
VOLUME  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
MD  
SLEEP  
STANDBY  
/ON  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
TUNER  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
■ Turning on the power  
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or  
POWER on the remote control) to turn on this  
unit.  
■ Setting this unit to the standby mode  
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel again (or  
STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit  
to the standby mode.  
STANDBY  
POWER  
STANDBY  
/ON  
STANDBY  
/ON  
or  
or  
Front panel  
Remote control  
Front panel  
Remote control  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BASIC SETUP  
BASIC SETUP  
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.  
Notes  
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.  
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU”  
(see page 78).  
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 78).  
• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.  
• Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
3
Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
AV  
5
6
7
8
MD  
SLEEP  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
9
0
ENT.  
PRESET/CH  
EFFECT  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
PRESET/CH  
TUNER  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
2,12  
3-11  
SRCH MODE  
V-AUX  
DVR  
ENTER  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
1
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
AUDIO  
(U.S.A. model)  
The “ROOM” appears in the front panel display.  
1
2
Set the component selector switch to AMP.  
4
Press j/ ito select the desired setting.  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Press SET MENU.  
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.  
ROOM: S >M L  
SET MENU  
MENU  
.
BASIC SETUP  
SRCH MODE  
Select the size of the room where you have installed  
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined  
as follows:  
Choices: S, M, L  
[U.S.A. and Canada models]  
2
2
S (small)  
16 x 13ft, 200ft (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m )  
2
2
M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m )  
2
2
L (large)  
26 x 19ft, 450ft (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m )  
[Other models]  
2
2
2
S (small)  
3.6 x 2.8m, 10m  
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m  
L (large)  
6.3 x 5.0m, 30m  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BASIC SETUP  
5
Press dto select “SUBWOOFER” and then  
j/ ito select the desired setting.  
7
Press donce and then j/ ito select the  
desired setting.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
..  
SUBWOOFER YES  
>SET CANCEL  
Choices: YES, NONE  
• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your  
system.  
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in  
your system.  
Choices: SET, CANCEL  
• Select “SET” to apply the settings you made.  
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure  
without making any changes.  
y
6
Press dto select “SPEAKERS” and then j/ i  
to select the number of speakers connected  
to this unit.  
You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup  
procedure.  
8
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
If you selected “SET” in step 7, each speaker outputs  
a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:TestTone” appears  
in the front panel display for a few seconds and then  
“CHECK OK?” appears in the front panel display.  
..  
SPEAKERS 6spk  
Choice Display  
L C R  
Speakers  
CHECK:TestTone  
Front L/R  
2spk  
y
SL SB SR  
Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the  
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 6, if necessary.  
L C R  
3spk  
Front L/R, Center  
SL SB SR  
L C R  
SL SB SR  
Front L/R, Surround L/R  
4spk  
L C R  
5spk  
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R  
SL SB SR  
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,  
Surround back  
L C R  
6spk  
SL SB SR  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
BASIC SETUP  
9
Press j/ ito select the desired setting.  
11 Press d/ uto select a speaker and then j/ i  
to adjust the balance.  
PRESET/CH  
The selected speaker and the front left speaker or the  
surround left speaker output a test tone in turn.  
• Press ito increase the value.  
ENTER  
• Press jto decrease the value.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
..  
CHECK OK? YES  
Choices: YES, NO  
• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if  
the test tone levels from each speaker were  
satisfactory.  
FR ----||----  
• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level  
adjustment menu to balance the output level of  
each speaker.  
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front  
left and right speakers.  
• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front  
left and center speakers.  
10 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.  
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front  
left and surround left speakers.  
PRESET/CH  
• Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the  
surround left and surround back speakers.  
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the  
surround left and surround right speakers.  
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the  
front left speaker and the subwoofer.  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
• If you selected “YES” in step 9, the setup  
procedure is completed and the display returns to  
the top “SET MENU” display.  
• If you selected “NO” in step 9, the front speaker  
level adjustment display appears in the front panel  
display.  
12 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC  
SETUP”.  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PLAYBACK  
---  
PLAYBACK  
CAUTION  
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD  
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may  
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the  
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
(or press one of the input selector buttons on  
the remote control) to select the desired  
input source.  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
MD  
SLEEP  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
INPUT  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
or  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
2
6
6 7  
3
5
Front panel  
Remote control  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
1
4
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
7
The name of the currently selected input source  
appears in the front panel display for a few seconds.  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
AV  
5
6
7
8
MD  
SLEEP  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
9
0
ENT.  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
2
EFFECT  
TUNER  
PRESET/CH  
Available input sources  
3
2
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
V-AUX  
DVR  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
SP  
5
A
AUDIO  
DISC SKIP  
L
R
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
DVD AUTO  
(U.S.A. model)  
Currently selected  
input mode  
Currently selected input  
source  
1
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this  
unit.  
Notes  
• If you are to select an input source connected via digital  
connections, set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”  
(see page 33).  
• For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when  
“XM” is selected as the input source, see page 54.  
Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel  
(or set the component selector switch to  
AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the  
remote control repeatedly).  
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B on the front  
panel, the respective speakers are turned on or off.  
4
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the source  
component.  
SPEAKERS  
A
B
See page 44 for details about tuning instructions.  
Front panel  
or  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
SPEAKERS  
9
Remote control  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PLAYBACK  
5
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press  
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust  
the volume to the desired output level.  
7
Press PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front  
panel (or press one of the sound field  
program selector buttons on the remote  
control repeatedly) to select the desired  
sound field program.  
VOLUME  
The name of the selected sound field program appears  
in the front panel display.  
or  
VOLUME  
See page 63 for details about sound field programs.  
l
PROGRAM  
h
Remote control  
Front panel  
Front panel  
or  
6
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel  
repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”  
and then press BASS/TREBLE +/– buttons to  
adjust the corresponding frequency  
response level.  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
BASS/TREBLE  
TONE CONTROL  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
EFFECT  
Remote control  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
SP  
A
L
R
L
R
TREBLE  
0dB  
TV Sports  
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency  
response.  
Currently selected surround field  
program  
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency  
response.  
Notes  
Notes  
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening  
preference, not merely on the name of the program.  
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically  
selects the last sound field program used with the  
corresponding input source.  
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the  
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is  
selected as the input source (see page 37).  
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS  
96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound  
field programs are applied.  
• To display information about the currently selected input  
source in the front panel display, see page 38 for details.  
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored  
independently.  
• When “TC.BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 81), and  
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output  
automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this  
unit.  
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-  
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of  
the surround speakers may not match that of the front left  
and right speakers.  
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT  
STEREO” mode (see page 38) is selected or when  
“MULTI CH INPUT” (see page 37) is selected as the  
input source.  
• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, see page 40  
for details.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USING OTHER FEATURES  
USING OTHER FEATURES  
Using SILENT CINEMA  
Selecting the night listening mode  
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel  
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS  
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA  
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones  
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or  
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 63). When  
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the  
front panel display.  
The night listening modes are designed to improve  
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either  
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on  
the type of material you are playing.  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press NIGHT on the remote control  
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or  
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.  
Notes  
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when “MULTI CH  
INPUT” is selected as the input source (see page 37).  
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT  
STEREO” (see page 38) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 37) is  
selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see  
page 37).  
AMP  
NIGHT  
SOURCE  
10  
TV  
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF  
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to  
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and  
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.  
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music  
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.  
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.  
Muting the audio output  
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the  
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the  
audio output.  
y
MUTE  
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT  
indicator lights up in the front panel display.  
y
2
Press j/ ion the remote control to adjust the  
effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or  
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front  
panel display.  
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME  
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.  
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYP.”  
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 81).  
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the  
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel  
display when the audio output is resumed.  
PRESET/CH  
Note  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
If you change the input source or the sound field program while  
the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio  
output.  
Remote control  
Effect.Lvl:MID  
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX  
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.  
• Select “MID” for standard compression.  
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
USING OTHER FEATURES  
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are  
stored independently.  
2
Press INPUT MODE on the front panel  
repeatedly to select the desired input mode.  
Notes  
INPUT MODE  
• You cannot use the night listening modes when the  
“DIRECT STEREO” program (see page 38) is selected or  
when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT  
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37) even  
though the NIGHT indicator lights up when “DIRECT  
STEREO” is selected.  
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness  
depending on the input source and surround sound settings  
you use.  
Available input sources  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
DVD AUTO  
Selecting the input mode  
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the  
following to select the type of input signals you want to  
use.  
Currently selected input  
mode  
Currently selected input  
source  
AUTO  
Automatically selects input signals in  
the following order:  
1) Digital signals  
y
2) Analog signals  
You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the  
“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 82).  
DTS  
Selects only digital signals encoded in  
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no  
sound is output.  
Notes  
ANALOG  
Selects only analog signals. If no  
analog signals are input, no sound is  
output.  
• To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs, (when using a digital  
audio connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.  
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any  
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding depending  
on the player even if you make a digital connection between this  
unit and the player.  
Notes  
• When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit  
automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a  
Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected.  
• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in  
most cases.  
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
to select the desired input source.  
INPUT  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USING OTHER FEATURES  
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching  
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep  
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front  
panel display, and the display returns to the selected  
sound field program.  
Using the sleep timer  
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the  
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep  
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit  
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also  
automatically turns off any external components  
connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 24).  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER pCD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
SLEEP  
L
R
SLEEP 120min  
Flashes  
1
Press one of the input selector buttons on  
the remote control to select the desired input  
source.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER pCD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
SLEEP  
MD  
SLEEP  
L
R
STRAIGHT  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
Lights up  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
4
To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on  
the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP  
OFF” appears in the front panel display.  
2
3
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the source  
component.  
SLEEP  
See page 44 for details about tuning instructions.  
Press SLEEP on the remote control  
repeatedly to set the amount of time.  
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display  
changes as shown below.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER pCD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
SLEEP OFF  
SLEEP  
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”  
disappears from the front panel display after a few  
seconds.  
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing  
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the  
front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.  
SLEEP 120min  
SLEEP 90min  
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USING OTHER FEATURES  
Adjusting the speaker level  
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while  
listening to a music source. This is also possible when  
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.  
2
Press j/ ion the remote control to adjust the  
speaker output level.  
• Press ito increase the value.  
• Press jto decrease the value.  
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB  
Note  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
This operation will override the level adjustments made in  
“BASIC SETUP” (see page 27) and “SP LEVEL” (see page 79).  
y
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on  
the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to  
select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust  
and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output  
level.  
3
Press ENTER on the remote control when  
you have completed your adjustment.  
AMP  
PRESET/CH  
1
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
TV  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
ENTER  
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
1
SRCH MODE  
3
2
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
(U.S.A. model)  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press LEVEL on the remote control  
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to  
adjust.  
AMP  
LEVEL  
SOURCE  
TITLE  
BAND  
TV  
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker  
output level.  
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker  
output level.  
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker  
output level.  
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right  
speaker output level.  
• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back  
speaker output level.  
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker  
output level.  
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output  
level.  
y
Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also  
select the speaker by pressing u/ d.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USING OTHER FEATURES  
Selecting the Compressed Music  
Enhancer mode  
1
Set the component selector switch and then  
press ENHANCER on the remote control  
repeatedly to select the desired Compressed  
Music Enhancer mode.  
The following display is shown in the front panel  
display and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in  
the front panel display.  
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are  
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is  
resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that  
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The  
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances  
your listening experience by regenerating the missing  
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened  
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as  
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass  
is compensated, providing the improved performance of  
the overall sound system.  
AMP  
ENHANCER  
SOURCE  
0
TV  
Lights up  
Notes  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the  
PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog  
2-channel input sources.  
ENHANCER  
A
L
R
ENHANCER 2CH  
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with  
any of the sound field programs.  
Choices: 2ch Stereo, 6ch Stereo, Off  
• Select “2ch Stereo” to play back compression  
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.  
• Select “6ch Stereo” to play back compression  
artifacts in 6-channel stereo.  
• Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music  
Enhancer mode.  
• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while  
an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not  
Available” appears in the front panel display.  
• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input  
source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned  
on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically  
turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in  
2-channel or 6-channel stereo.  
Note  
y
When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously  
selected sound field program.  
The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display  
when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.  
2
Press j/ ion the remote control to select the  
desired effect level.  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Choices: HIGH, LOW  
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.  
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.  
Note  
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the  
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of  
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, se  
the effect level to “LOW”.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USING OTHER FEATURES  
t
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT  
component  
Enjoying unprocessed input  
sources  
Use this feature to select the component connected to the  
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 22) as the input  
source.  
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel  
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right  
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into  
the appropriate channels without any additional effect  
processing.  
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or  
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that  
“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel  
display.  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press STRAIGHT on the remote  
control to select “STRAIGHT”.  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
MULTI CH IN  
or  
AMP  
STRAIGHT  
ENT.  
SOURCE  
EFFECT  
Front panel  
Remote control  
TV  
MULTI CH INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
Note  
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,  
no other source can be played. To select another input source with  
the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector  
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the  
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the  
front panel display.  
2
To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press  
STRAIGHT on the remote control again so  
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front  
panel display.  
The sound effect is turned back on.  
Enjoying multi-channel sources in  
2-channel stereo  
y
You can also select “STRAIGHT” by pressing STRAIGHT  
(EFFECT) on the front panel.  
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels  
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.  
Set the component selector switch to AMP and  
then press STEREO on the remote control  
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.  
AMP  
STEREO  
1
SOURCE  
TV  
2ch Stereo  
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “BASS OUT”  
is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 79).  
• You can also select “2ch Stereo” by pressing the  
PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
USING OTHER FEATURES  
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound  
The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass  
the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you  
can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and  
analog sources.  
Displaying the input source  
information  
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,  
bit rate, and flag data of the current input signal.  
Set the component selector switch to AMP and  
then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to  
select “DIRECT STEREO”.  
1
Press one of the input selector buttons to  
select the desired input source.  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
AMP  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
DIRECT ST.  
SOURCE  
TUNER  
8
TV  
V-AUX  
DVR  
2
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press STRAIGHT on the remote  
control to select “STRAIGHT”.  
DIRECT STEREO  
“
AMP  
STRAIGHT  
SOURCE  
Notes  
ENT.  
TV  
EFFECT  
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS  
when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.  
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,  
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog  
input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 33),  
no sound will be output.  
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.  
• “TONE CONTROL” (see page 31) and “SOUND MENU” (see  
page 78) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not  
effective.  
STRAIGHT  
• The front panel display automatically dims.  
3
Press u/ dto display the information about  
the input signal.  
y
You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by pressing  
PRESET/CH  
the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel repeatedly.  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
USING OTHER FEATURES  
The following information appears in the front panel  
display for a few seconds.  
Playing video sources in the  
background  
Signal format  
Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a  
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog  
input.  
Display status: Analog, Digital, Dolby Digital, DTS,  
PCM, Unknown Digital  
You can combine a video image from a video source with  
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy  
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful  
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.  
Press the input selector buttons on the remote  
control to select a video source and then an  
audio source.  
Note  
“Unknown Digital” appears when this unit detects any  
undecodable digital signals.  
MD
SLEEP
Channel in:  
CD
CD-R
XM
The number of source channels in the input signal  
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel  
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround  
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”.  
Audio sources  
Video sources  
CBL
MULTICHIN
DVD
DTV TUNER
V-AUXDVR
Sampling frequency fs:  
The number of samples per second taken from a  
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.  
Display status: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz,  
88.2kHz, 96kHz  
Note  
If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH  
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video  
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or  
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select “MULTI CH  
INPUT” as the input source (see page 37).  
Bit rate rate:  
The number of bits passing a given point per second.  
Flag flg:  
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM  
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch  
decoders.  
y
When you are displaying information about the input source, this  
unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 37). To turn back the  
sound effect on, press “STRAIGHT” again.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND  
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND  
Decoders  
Enjoying multi-channel sources in  
surround  
You can select from the following decoders depending on  
the format of the source you are playing.  
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature  
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources  
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or  
DTS-ES decoders.  
Decoder  
Functions  
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals  
in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx  
music decoder.  
PLIIxMusic  
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals  
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital  
EX or DTS-ES decoder.  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote  
control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and  
6.1-channel playback.  
EX/ES  
EX  
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals  
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital  
EX decoder.  
AMP  
EXTD SUR.  
SOURCE  
7
Off OFF  
TV  
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.  
Notes  
2
Press j/ irepeatedly to select a decoder  
while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.  
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag  
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing  
these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually  
from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.  
PRESET/CH  
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD  
SUR. in the following cases:  
– When “SUR. LR” (see page 78) or “SUR. B” (see page 78) is  
set to “NONE”.  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is  
being played.  
Auto AUTO  
– When the source being played does not contain surround left  
and right channel signals.  
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.  
– When “2ch Stereo” (see page 37) or “DIRECT STEREO”  
(see page 38) program is selected.  
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to  
“AUTO”.  
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set  
to “NONE” (see page 78).  
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is  
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back  
the signal in 6.1 channels.  
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present  
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1  
channels.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND  
Enjoying 2-channel sources in  
surround  
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played  
back on multi-channels.  
SUR. STANDARD  
Functions  
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any  
sources  
PRO LOGIC  
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for  
movie sources  
PLII Movie  
PLII Music  
PLII Game  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press STANDARD on the remote  
control repeatedly to switch between the  
“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”  
programs or press MOVIE to select the  
“MOVIE THEATER” programs.  
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for  
music sources  
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for  
game sources  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for  
movie sources  
PLIIx Movie  
PLIIx Music  
PLIIx Game  
STANDARD  
5
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for  
music sources  
AMP  
SOURCE  
or  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for  
game sources  
TV  
MOVIE  
4
DTS processing for movie sources  
DTS processing for music sources  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
2
Press SELECT on the remote control  
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.  
Neural Surround processing for any  
sources (U.S.A. and Canada models  
only)  
Neural Sur.  
SELECT  
6
SUR. ENHANCED  
or  
Functions  
MOVIE THEATER  
You can select from the following modes depending on the  
type of source you are playing and your personal  
preference.  
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any  
sources  
PRO LOGIC  
y
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for  
movie sources  
PLII Movie  
You can also select a decoder by pressing j/ ion the remote  
control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel  
display.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for  
movie sources  
PLIIx Movie  
Neo:6 Cinema  
DTS processing for movie sources  
Notes  
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B” is set  
to “NONE” (see page 78).  
• The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with the PCM  
signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz) and the analog  
2-channel input sources.  
• The Neural Surround decoder is not effective with any of the  
sound field programs.  
• When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input  
while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel  
sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels  
without any additional effect processing and the Neural  
Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND  
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP  
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA  
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates  
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.  
If you set “SUR. LR” to “NONE” (see page 78), Virtual  
CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you  
select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 63).  
Note  
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. LR” is  
set to “NONE” (see page 78) in the following cases:  
– When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT  
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37).  
– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.  
– When the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 38) or “2ch Stereo”  
mode (see page 37) is selected, or when this unit is in the  
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 37).  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RECORDING  
RECORDING  
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating  
instructions for those components.  
Notes  
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.  
• The setting of the TONE CONTROL (see page 31), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 79) and the sound field programs  
(see page 62) do not affect recorded material.  
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.  
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing  
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an  
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.  
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.  
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.  
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
• The XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.  
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.  
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture  
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.  
1
2
Turn on all the connected components.  
(U.S.A. model)  
VOLUME  
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
(or press one of the input selector buttons on  
the remote control) to select the source  
component you want to record from.  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
MD  
SLEEP  
INPUT  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
2
TUNER  
or  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
AV  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
Front panel  
Remote control  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
TUNER  
2
V-AUX  
DVR  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
3
4
Start playback on the selected source  
component or select a broadcast station.  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
(U.S.A. model)  
Start recording on the recording component.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM/AM TUNING  
FM/AM TUNING  
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and  
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use  
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of  
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset  
stations with each other.  
Note  
3
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that  
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front  
panel display.  
Orient the connected FM and AM antenna for the best reception.  
Automatic tuning  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are  
strong and there is no interference.  
AUTO/MAN'L  
2
(U.S.A. model)  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
AUTO TUNED  
VOLUME  
SP  
A
STANDBY  
/ON  
L
R
A AM 1440 kHz  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
No colon (:)  
Lights up  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning  
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the  
colon (:) off.  
3
4
1 3  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
EDIT  
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”  
as the input source.  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ honce to  
begin automatic tuning.  
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED  
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received  
station is shown in the front panel display.  
INPUT  
Front panel  
• Press hto tune into a higher frequency.  
• Press lto tune into a lower frequency.  
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.  
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
LEVEL  
FM/AM  
or  
FM  
AM  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
AUTO TUNED  
SP  
A
L
R
A AM 1530 kHz  
Lights up  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FM/AM TUNING  
Manual tuning  
If the signal received from the station you want to select is  
weak, tune into it manually.  
3
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that  
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front  
panel display.  
Note  
TUNING MODE  
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the  
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.  
DISPLAY  
AUTO/MAN'L  
2
(U.S.A. model)  
VOLUME  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
TUNED  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SP  
A
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
L
R
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
A AM 1440 kHz  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
No colon (:)  
Disappears  
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning  
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to  
turn the colon (:) off.  
3
4
1 3  
PRESET/TUNING  
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”  
as the input source.  
SEARCH MODE  
EDIT  
INPUT  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hto tune  
into the desired station manually.  
Hold down the button to continue searching.  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
Front panel  
LEVEL  
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.  
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.  
FM/AM  
or  
FM  
AM  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FM/AM TUNING  
Automatic preset tuning  
3
Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)  
for more than 3 seconds.  
The preset station number and the MEMORY and  
AUTO indicators flash. After approximately 5  
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current  
frequency and proceeds toward the higher  
frequencies.  
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store  
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8  
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station  
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any  
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.  
MEMORY  
3
2
(U.S.A. model)  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
Flash  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
AUTO TUNED MEMORY  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
VOLUME  
dB  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
SP  
A
L
R
A1:FM 87.5 MHz  
Flashes  
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front  
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset  
station.  
3
1
1
2
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”  
as the input source.  
y
You can specify the preset number from which this unit  
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower  
frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning  
options” on page 47.  
INPUT  
Notes  
Front panel  
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station  
number is cleared when you store a new station under the  
same preset station number.  
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),  
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after  
searching for all the available stations.  
Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception  
band.  
“FM” appears in the front panel display.  
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored  
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station  
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it  
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset  
tuning”.  
FM/AM  
FM  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FM/AM TUNING  
■ Automatic preset tuning options  
You can specify the preset number from which this unit  
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower  
frequencies.  
Manual preset tuning  
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset  
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)  
manually.  
Note  
First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on  
page 46.  
2,5  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
VOLUME  
•
Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/  
CH l/ hto select the preset station  
number under which the first station will be  
stored.  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
been stored up to E8.  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
A/B/C/D/E  
4
CATEGORY  
LEVEL  
NEXT  
1
Tune into a station automatically or manually.  
See pages 44 and 45 for tuning instructions.  
•
Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)  
disappears from the front panel display and  
then press PRESET/TUNING/CH lto begin  
tuning toward lower frequencies.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
TUNED  
SP  
A
L
R
A AM 630 kHz  
PRESET/TUNING  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
SEARCH MODE  
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel  
display shows the frequency of the station received.  
EDIT  
LEVEL  
2
3
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).  
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel  
display for approximately 5 seconds.  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
Flashes  
Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset  
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY  
indicator is flashing.  
The selected preset station group letter appears.  
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel  
display.  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
NEXT  
Flashes  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
TUNED MEMORY  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
C :AM 630 kHz  
Preset station  
group  
Colon (:)  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
FM/AM TUNING  
Selecting preset stations  
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting  
the preset station group and number under which it was  
stored.  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hto select a  
preset station number (1 to 8) while the  
MEMORY indicator is flashing.  
• Press hto select a higher preset station number.  
• Press lto select a lower preset station number.  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
(U.S.A. model)  
LEVEL  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
Flashes  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
TUNED MEMORY  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
VOLUME  
dB  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SP  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
A
L
R
C3:AM 630 kHz  
1
2
Preset station number  
5
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the  
MEMORY indicator is flashing.  
The station band and frequency appear in the front  
panel display with the preset station group and  
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator  
disappears from the front panel display.  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
1
2
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
(U.S.A. model)  
y
MEMORY  
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the  
component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER  
to select “TUNER” as the input source.  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
1
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel  
(or A-E/CAT. j/ ion the remote control) to  
select the desired preset station group  
(A to E).  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
TUNED  
SP  
A
L
R
C3:AM 630 kHz  
The preset station group letter appears in the front  
panel display and changes each time you press the  
button.  
The displayed station has been stored as C3.  
6
Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other  
stations.  
PRESET/CH  
A/B/C/D/E  
Notes  
CATEGORY  
ENTER  
or  
NEXT  
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station  
number is cleared when you store a new station under the  
same preset station number.  
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along  
with the station frequency.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Remote control  
Front panel  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FM/AM TUNING  
Exchanging preset stations  
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations  
with each other. The example below describes the  
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.  
2
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the  
front panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the  
remote control) to select the desired preset  
station number (1 to 8).  
The preset station group and number appear in the  
front panel display along with the station band and  
frequency.  
2,4  
(U.S.A. model)  
PRESET/CH  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
ENTER  
or  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
LEVEL  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
Front panel  
Remote control  
1,3  
1,3  
1
2
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E  
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ h.  
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 48.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
TUNED  
SP  
A
L
R
E1:FM 87.5 MHz  
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3  
seconds.  
y
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front  
panel display.  
You can select the desired preset station number (1 to 8) directly  
by pressing the numeric buttons on the remote control.  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
EDIT  
Flashes  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
TUNED MEMORY  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
E1:FM 87.5 MHz  
Flashes  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FM/AM TUNING  
3
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E  
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ h.  
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front  
panel display.  
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 48.  
PRESET/TUNING  
A/B/C/D/E  
SEARCH MODE  
CATEGORY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
Flashes  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
TUNED MEMORY  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
A5:FM 90.6 MHz  
Flashes  
4
Press EDIT again.  
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and  
the assignments of the two preset stations are  
exchanged.  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
EDIT  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
TUNED  
SP  
A
L
R
EDIT E1-A5  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
®
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States, broadcasting live  
daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes more than 150 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67  
commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of  
premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and  
weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.  
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM  
using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on  
page 53. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at  
“http://www.xmradio.com/”.  
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround  
sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.  
Notes  
• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii).  
• XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio  
website at “http://www.xmradio.com/”.  
• For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at  
“http://www.xmradio.com/” or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products.  
• To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory must be placed  
at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.  
■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost. Installation  
costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and  
programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for  
XM radio receivers by calling “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)”. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at  
xmradio.com. Only available in the 48 continuous United States. © 2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other  
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory  
Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this  
unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory.  
y
XM Connect-and-Play digital  
antenna accessory  
(sold separately)  
XM  
(U.S.A. model)  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions  
Note  
The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or  
set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.  
■ Front panel functions  
■ Remote control functions  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
(U.S.A. model)  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
MD  
SLEEP  
5
6
7
8
CATEGORY  
1
2
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
9
0
ENT.  
5
6
INPUT  
TUNER  
EFFECT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PRESET/CH  
INPUT MODE  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
EFFECT  
SRCH MODE  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
ENTER  
3
4
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
7
Set to SOURCE  
(U.S.A. model)  
2
1
3
4
5
1 XM  
1 SEARCH MODE  
Selects “XM” as the input source.  
Changes the search mode between the All Channel  
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes  
(see page 55).  
2 Numeric buttons  
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)  
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.  
(Preset Search mode)  
2 CATEGORY  
(All Channel Search mode)  
Changes the channel category while staying in the All  
Channel Search mode.  
(Category Search mode)  
Changes the channel category.  
(Preset Search mode)  
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.  
3 Cursor buttons u/ d / j/ i  
(All Channel Search mode)  
Press A-E/CAT. j/ ito change the channel category.  
Press PRESET/CH u/ dto search for a channel within  
all channels. Press and hold for quick search.  
(Category Search mode)  
Press A-E/CAT. j/ ito change the channel category.  
Press PRESET/CH u/ dto search for a channel within  
the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.  
(Preset Search mode)  
Press A-E/CAT. j/ ito change the preset channel group  
(A to E).  
Press PRESET/CH u/ dto change the preset channel  
number (1 to 8).  
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).  
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ h  
(All Channel Search mode)  
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold  
for quick search.  
(Category Search mode)  
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press  
and hold for quick search.  
(Preset Search mode)  
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).  
4 XM MEMORY  
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 59).  
4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)  
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 59).  
5 ENT.  
5 DISPLAY  
Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct  
Number Access mode (see page 58).  
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as  
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or  
song title displayed in the front panel display  
(see page 60).  
6 SRCH MODE  
Changes the search mode between the All Channel  
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes  
(see page 55).  
7 DISPLAY  
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as  
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or  
song title displayed in the front panel display  
(see page 60).  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
Activating XM Satellite Radio  
2
Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level  
and adjust the orientation of the XM Connect-  
and-Play digital antenna accessory for a  
better percentage of the reception level.  
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio  
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.  
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and  
then visit the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com” or  
call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a major  
credit card handy for signing up.  
y
You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by  
using the “XM ANT.” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see  
page 83).  
(U.S.A. model)  
Notes  
VOLUME  
• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel  
display, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna  
accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on the  
rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM  
Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory” on page 51  
and check the connection.  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
• The “XM ANT.” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see  
page 83) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control.  
Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM  
Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connected to  
the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the  
reception level.  
3
1
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
1
TUNER  
5
6
7
8
3
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the  
front panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the  
remote control) to select channel “0”.  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
1
3
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
PRESET/CH  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
(U.S.A. model)  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
ENTER  
or  
LEVEL  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
(or set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote  
control) to select “XM” as the input source.  
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in  
the front panel display.  
Front panel  
Remote control  
Note  
You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search  
mode (see page 55) is not selected.  
INPUT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
XM  
or  
4
Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number  
displayed in the front panel display and write  
it down.  
Front panel  
Remote control  
ID:_____________________________________  
Lights up  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
XM RADIO  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
Basic XM Satellite Radio  
operations  
2
Search for a channel by using one of the XM  
Satellite Radio search modes.  
See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode”  
on page 55 for details.  
y
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the  
surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio  
broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 41).  
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see  
page 59).  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
1
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
1
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the  
front panel display (see page 60).  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
(U.S.A. model)  
1
Set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote  
control to select “XM” as the input source.  
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in  
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio  
information (such as channel number, channel name,  
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently  
selected channel appears in the front panel display.  
AMP  
SOURCE  
XM  
TV  
Remote control  
Lights up  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
[001] Preview  
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit  
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.  
Note  
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the  
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
Selecting the XM Satellite Radio  
search mode  
2
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel  
(or SRCH MODE on the remote control)  
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.  
You can search for the desired channel using one of the  
three search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search,  
and Preset Search modes). You can also enter the channel  
number directly to select the desired channel by using the  
Direct Number Access mode (see page 58).  
PRESET/TUNING  
SET MENU  
SEARCH MODE  
MENU  
or  
EDIT  
SRCH MODE  
Front panel  
Remote control  
■ All Channel Search mode  
(U.S.A. model)  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
VOLUME  
L
R
ALL CH SEARCH  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
3
Press CATEGORY on the front panel  
(or A-E/CAT. j/ ion the remote control)  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
repeatedly to change the channel category.  
2
3 4  
1
PRESET/CH  
A/B/C/D/E  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
MD  
SLEEP  
1
2
4
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
or  
CATEGORY  
ENTER  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
1
NEXT  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
TUNER  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
Front panel  
Remote control  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
2
3-4  
SRCH MODE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
1
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
(U.S.A. model)  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the  
front panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the  
remote control) repeatedly to search for a  
channel within all channels.  
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
(or set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote  
control) to select “XM” as the input source.  
PRESET/CH  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
ENTER  
INPUT  
or  
LEVEL  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Front panel  
Remote control  
Front panel  
or  
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and  
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the front panel  
(or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote control).  
AMP  
SOURCE  
XM  
TV  
Remote control  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
■ Category Search mode  
2
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel  
(or SRCH MODE on the remote control)  
repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.  
(U.S.A. model)  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SET MENU  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
SEARCH MODE  
or  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
MENU  
INPUT  
EDIT  
SRCH MODE  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
Front panel  
Remote control  
2
3 4  
1
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
MD  
SLEEP  
1
2
4
SP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
A
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
1
L
R
TUNER  
5
6
7
8
CAT SEARCH  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
2
3-4  
SRCH MODE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
3
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or  
A-E/CAT. j/ ion the remote control)  
repeatedly to change the channel category.  
1
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
(U.S.A. model)  
PRESET/CH  
A/B/C/D/E  
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
(or set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote  
control) to select “XM” as the input source.  
CATEGORY  
or  
ENTER  
NEXT  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Front panel  
Remote control  
INPUT  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the  
front panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the  
remote control) repeatedly to search for a  
channel within the selected channel  
category.  
Front panel  
or  
PRESET/CH  
AMP  
SOURCE  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
XM  
or  
ENTER  
TV  
LEVEL  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Remote control  
Front panel  
Remote control  
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and  
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the front panel  
(or PRESET/CH u/ don the remote control).  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
■ Preset Search mode  
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search  
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For  
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset  
channels” on page 59.  
2
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or  
SRCH MODE on the remote control)  
repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.  
SET MENU  
PRESET/TUNING  
MENU  
SEARCH MODE  
or  
y
SRCH MODE  
EDIT  
All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial  
Front panel  
Remote control  
factory setting.  
(U.S.A. model)  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
SP  
DISPLAY  
A
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
L
R
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
PRESET SEARCH  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
3
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or  
A-E/CAT. j/ ion the remote control)  
repeatedly to change the preset channel  
group (A to E).  
2
3 4  
1
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
MD  
SLEEP  
2
4
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
1
PRESET/CH  
TUNER  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
A/B/C/D/E  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
CATEGORY  
or  
ENTER  
2
3-4  
SRCH MODE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
NEXT  
1
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
Front panel  
Remote control  
(U.S.A. model)  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the  
front panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the  
remote control) repeatedly to change the  
preset channel number (1 to 8).  
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel  
(or set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote  
control) to select “XM” as the input source.  
PRESET/CH  
INPUT  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
ENTER  
or  
LEVEL  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Front panel  
Front panel  
Remote control  
or  
AMP  
SOURCE  
y
XM  
You can also select the preset channel number directly by  
TV  
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.  
Remote control  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
■ Direct Number Access mode  
3
Press the numeric buttons on the remote  
control to enter the desired three-digit  
channel number.  
For example, to enter the number 123, press the  
numeric buttons as shown below.  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
3
1
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
1
5
6
7
8
TUNER  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
V-AUX  
DVR  
9
0
ENT.  
3
2
EFFECT  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
ENTER  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
1
2
3
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
(U.S.A. model)  
The display changes as follows.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
1
2
Set the component selector switch to  
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote  
control to select “XM” as the input source.  
A
L
R
<XM> --1  
AMP  
SOURCE  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
TV  
L
R
<XM> -12  
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control  
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or  
“CAT SEARCH”.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
<XM>123  
SET MENU  
MENU  
Press the numeric buttons and ENT. on the  
remote control to enter the desired one-digit  
or two-digit channel number.  
SRCH MODE  
For example, to enter the number 12, press the  
numeric buttons as shown below.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
STRAIGHT  
SP  
A
1
2
ENT.  
L
R
ALL CH SEARCH  
or  
EFFECT  
y
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
• Instead of pressing ENT. to tune into the channel  
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit  
confirms the entered channel number.  
SP  
A
L
R
CAT SEARCH  
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter  
a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically  
confirms the entered channel number.  
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT.  
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
Setting the XM Satellite Radio  
preset channels  
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite  
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in  
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall  
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel  
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”  
on page 57.  
2
Press MEMORY on the front panel  
(or XM MEMORY on the remote control).  
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel  
display for approximately 5 seconds.  
MEMORY  
RETURN  
or  
XM MEMORY  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
Front panel  
Remote control  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
2,5  
VOLUME  
MEMORY  
STANDBY  
/ON  
Flashes  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
CATEGORY  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
Note  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while  
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel  
display.  
4
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
3
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or  
A-E/CAT. j/ ion the remote control)  
repeatedly to select a preset channel group  
(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is  
flashing.  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
3-4  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
The preset channel group letter appears in the front  
panel display.  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
2,5  
PRESET/CH  
(U.S.A. model)  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
or  
ENTER  
1
Search for a channel you want to set as a  
preset channel by using one of the XM  
Satellite Radio search modes.  
See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode”  
on page 55 for details.  
NEXT  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
Front panel  
Remote control  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
[040] Deep Tra  
Flashes  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD  
MEMORY  
VOLUME  
dB  
Currently selected channel number  
SP  
A
L
R
C [040] Deep  
Currently selected preset channel group  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio  
information  
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such  
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,  
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front  
panel display.  
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l/ hon the  
front panel (or PRESET/CH u/ don the  
remote control) repeatedly to select a preset  
channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY  
indicator is flashing.  
The preset channel number appears in the front panel  
display.  
(U.S.A. model)  
PRESET/CH  
VOLUME  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
STANDBY  
/ON  
ENTER  
or  
LEVEL  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
Front panel  
Remote control  
Flashes  
DISPLAY  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
MEMORY  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
L
R
C5 [040] Deep  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
Currently selected preset channel number  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
5
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM  
MEMORY on the remote control) to set the  
selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a  
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator  
is flashing.  
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number  
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns  
off in the front panel display.  
(U.S.A. model)  
Note  
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel  
display, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)”  
section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 95 for appropriate  
remedies.  
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio  
MEMORY  
RETURN  
information in the front panel display  
or  
XM MEMORY  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the  
remote control repeatedly to toggle between the  
following XM information display modes.  
Front panel  
Remote control  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
Channel number / name  
AUTO/MAN'L  
A
L
R
Front panel  
C5:[040] Deep  
Channel category  
or  
Colon (:)  
DISPLAY  
Artist name / Song title  
Note  
Remote control  
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously  
stored in the same preset channel group and number is  
cleared.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING  
When the channel number / name is displayed:  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
[040] Deep Tra  
When the channel category is displayed:  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
<CAT>Rock  
When the artist name / song title is displayed:  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD pXM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
R
Coldplay / Clo  
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric  
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM  
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a  
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by  
using the “SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see  
page 83).  
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that  
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be replaced  
with a space.  
Note  
If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information  
display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the  
XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as  
described above.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In  
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and  
shape of the room in which we are sitting.  
■ Elements of a sound field  
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound  
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.  
Early reflections  
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one  
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.  
Reverberations  
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous  
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct  
sound.  
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and  
shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound  
fields.  
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be  
able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a  
dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA  
has done with the digital sound field processor.  
Selecting sound field programs  
Notes  
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.  
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.  
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input  
source (see page 37).  
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs  
are applied.  
■ Front panel operations  
■ Remote control operations  
(U.S.A. model)  
AMP  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
VOLUME  
TV  
STANDBY  
/ON  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
DISPLAY  
sound field program  
selector buttons  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
4
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
EFFECT  
5
6
7
8
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
(U.S.A. model)  
PROGRAM l/ hbuttons  
Set the component selector switch to AMP and  
then press one of the sound field program  
selector buttons on the remote control  
repeatedly.  
The name of the selected sound field program appears in  
the front panel display.  
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front  
panel repeatedly.  
The name of the selected sound field program appears in  
the front panel display.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field program descriptions  
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from  
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field  
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.  
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”  
to “AUTO” (see page 33) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.  
Notes  
• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken  
in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming  
from the front, back, left and right.  
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.  
■ For movie/video sources  
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”  
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel  
stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.  
y
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound  
field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 62).  
Remote  
control  
button  
Sound FIeld Program  
Features  
Sources  
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel  
sources as they are.  
STEREO  
2ch Stereo  
1
2
CINEMA DSP processing. Creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can  
feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.  
MUSIC  
Pop/Rock  
CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces the sound environment of a large concert  
hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching  
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports  
programs.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
TV Sports  
MULTI  
2-CH  
CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces monaural video sources (such as old  
movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the  
presence sound field.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Mono Movie  
3
CINEMA DSP processing. Adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game  
sounds.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Game  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Remote  
control  
button  
Sound FIeld Program  
Features  
Sources  
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound  
field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound  
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby  
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.  
MOVIE THEATER  
Spectacle  
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in  
the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and  
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films  
encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field  
employing the most advanced techniques.  
MOVIE THEATER  
Sci-Fi  
4
MULTI  
2-CH  
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the  
newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of  
the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are  
restrained as much as possible.  
MOVIE THEATER  
Adventure  
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and  
multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.  
MOVIE THEATER  
General  
Standard processing for the selected decoder.  
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.  
SUR. STANDARD  
SUR. ENHANCED  
5
■ For music sources  
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.  
y
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound  
field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 62).  
Remote  
control  
button  
Sound Field Program  
Features  
Sources  
2-CH  
Plays back 2-channel sources.  
STEREO  
2ch Stereo  
1
2
Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a  
larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.  
STEREO  
6ch Stereo  
HiFi DSP processing. The program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert  
hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely  
complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.  
MUSIC  
Hall in Vienna  
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom  
Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.  
MUSIC  
The Bttm Line  
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music  
environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A.The  
listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.  
MUSIC  
The Roxy Thtr  
MULTI  
2-CH  
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a  
lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and  
energetic sound.  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Disco  
3
5
Standard processing for the selected decoder.  
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.  
SUR. STANDARD  
SUR. ENHANCED  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Changing sound field parameter  
settings  
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory  
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial  
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to  
better suit the input source or your listening room.  
2
Press one of the sound field program  
selector buttons repeatedly to select the  
desired sound field program you want to  
adjust.  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
Notes  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to  
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a  
sound field program group (see page 83).  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
EFFECT  
• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when  
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”  
(see page 83). If you want to change the sound field parameter  
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
3
Press u/ dto select the desired sound field  
parameter and then j/ ito change the  
selected sound field parameter value.  
• Press ito increase the value.  
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound  
field parameter, see page 66.  
• Press jto decrease the value.  
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary to change other sound field  
program parameter settings.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
• If you press and hold j/ ito change the sound field parameter  
value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the  
front panel display.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
2
3
AV  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
MD  
SLEEP  
5
6
7
8
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
9
0
ENT.  
TUNER  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
V-AUX  
DVR  
SRCH MODE  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
1
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
(U.S.A. model)  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP.  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
■ Sound field parameter descriptions  
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your  
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.  
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 65 for details.  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on  
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level  
relative to the level of the direct sound.  
DSP LEVEL  
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB  
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance  
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection  
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The  
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set  
to a large value.  
INIT. DLY  
P.INIT.DLY  
S.INIT.DLY  
SB INI.DLY  
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT. DLY and P. INT. DLY)  
1 to 49 ms (S. INIT. DLY and SB INI. DLY)  
Source sound  
Early  
reflections  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Delay  
Delay  
Delay  
Sound source  
Reflection face  
Small value = 1 ms  
Large value = 99 ms  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Room size. Presence, surround and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the  
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the  
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between  
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the  
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter  
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.  
ROOM SIZE  
P.ROOM SIZE  
S.ROOM SIZE  
SB RM SIZE  
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0  
Source sound  
Early  
reflections  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Sound source  
Small value = 0.1  
Large value = 2.0  
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the  
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound  
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which  
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as  
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets  
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.  
LIVENESS  
S. LIVENESS  
SB LIVENESS  
Control range: 0 to 10  
Source sound  
Live  
Dead  
Time  
Time  
Time  
Small reflected  
sound  
Large reflected  
sound  
Small value = 0  
Large value = 10  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation  
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment  
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening  
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.  
REV.TIME  
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s  
Reverberation  
Source sound  
Reverberation  
Early reflections  
60 dB  
60 dB  
60 dB  
REV.TIME  
REV.TIME  
REV.TIME  
Sound source  
Short  
reverberation  
Long  
reverberation  
Small value = 1.0 s  
Large value = 5.0 s  
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and  
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound  
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.  
REV.DELAY  
Control range: 0 to 250 ms  
Source sound  
REV. LEVEL  
Time  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the  
stronger the reverberation becomes.  
REV.LEVEL  
Control range: 0 to 100%  
Source sound  
(dB)  
60 dB  
Reverberation  
Time  
REV.DELAY  
REV.TIME  
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi  
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.  
2ch Stereo  
DIRECT  
Choices: AUTO, OFF  
y
• The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and  
“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 31).  
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2  
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.  
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the  
subwoofer in the following cases:  
– “BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 79).  
– “FRONT” is set to “SMALL” (see page 78) and “BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see  
page 79).  
6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, and surround back levels. Adjusts the  
volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.  
6ch Stereo  
CT LEVEL  
SL LEVEL  
SR LEVEL  
SB LEVEL  
Control range: 0 to 100%  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field parameter  
Features  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround  
speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music  
PRO LOGIC II Music  
PANORAMA  
Choices: OFF, ON  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards  
the front or towards the rear.  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music  
PRO LOGIC II Music  
DIMENSION  
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)  
Initial setting: STD (standard)  
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output  
completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value  
moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.  
PRO LOGIC IIx Music  
PRO LOGIC II Music  
CT WIDTH  
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to  
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)  
Initial setting: 3  
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the  
center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.  
DTS Neo:6 Music  
C. IMAGE  
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0  
Initial setting: 0.3  
y
The “Pro Logic IIx Music”, “Pro Logic II Music”, and DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR. STANDARD” is  
selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select “SUR.  
STANDARD” (see page 41).  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
Sound field program speaker layouts  
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table  
below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.  
Note  
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.  
Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as  
special sound effects, etc.  
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “6ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speaker (see  
page 40).  
The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:  
L
C
R
SL  
SR  
SB  
Front left speaker  
Center speaker  
Surround left speaker  
Surround right speaker  
Surround back speaker  
Front right speaker  
Speaker from which sound is being out  
Speaker from which no sound is being output  
*
When the qEX / qPL IIx / ES indicators are turned off in the front panel display  
2-channel audio  
(monaural)  
2-channel audio  
Sound field program  
5.1/6.1-channel audio *  
(stereo)  
STEREO  
2ch Stereo  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
STEREO  
6ch Stereo  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
MUSIC  
Hall in Vienna  
The Bttm Line  
The Roxy Thtr  
ENTERTAINMENT  
Disco  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
MUSIC  
Pop/Rock  
ENTERTAINMENT  
TV Sports  
Mono Movie  
Game  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
2-channel audio  
(monaural)  
2-channel audio  
(stereo)  
Sound field program  
5.1/6.1-channel audio *  
MOVIE THEATER  
Spectacle  
Sci-Fi  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
Adventure  
General  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
SUR. STANDARD  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
PRO LOGIC  
DTS  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
SUR. STANDARD  
PLII Movie  
PLII Music  
PLII Game  
C
C
L
R
L
R
PLIIx Movie  
PLIIx Music  
PLIIx Game  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx  
Pro Logic II  
C
L
R
SL  
SR  
SB  
Pro Logic IIx  
SUR. STANDARD  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
Cinema  
Cinema/Music  
C
L
R
SL  
SR  
SB  
Music  
SUR. STANDARD  
Neural Sur.  
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS  
2-channel audio  
(monaural)  
2-channel audio  
(stereo)  
Sound field program  
5.1/6.1-channel audio *  
SUR. ENHANCED  
DOLBY DIGITAL  
PRO LOGIC  
DTS  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
Pro Logic  
Pro Logic  
SUR. ENHANCED  
PLII Movie  
PLIIx Movie  
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
Pro Logic II  
C
L
R
SL  
SR  
SB  
Pro Logic IIx  
SUR. ENHANCED  
Neo:6 Cinema  
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
STRAIGHT  
C
C
C
L
R
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
SB  
Monaural playback  
DIRECT STEREO  
C
C
L
R
L
R
SL  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SB  
SB  
Monaural playback  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MENU  
SET MENU  
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this  
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening  
environment.  
■ BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP  
Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 27).  
■ MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP  
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.  
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU  
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or  
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.  
Parameter  
Features  
Page  
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the  
crossover frequency.  
78  
A)SPEAKER SET  
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.  
79  
80  
80  
80  
81  
81  
B)SP LEVEL  
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.  
C)SP DISTANCE  
D)CENTER GEQ  
E)LFE LEVEL  
F)D. RANGE  
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.  
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.  
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.  
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.  
G)AUDIO SET  
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU  
Use this menu to manually reassign the input jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.  
Parameter  
A)INPUT ASSIGN  
B)INPUT MODE  
C)INPUT RENAME  
D)VOLUME TRIM  
Features  
Assigns the input jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.  
Selects the initial input mode of the source.  
Page  
81  
82  
Changes the name of the input source.  
82  
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.  
82  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MENU  
Option menu 3 OPTION MENU  
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.  
Parameter  
A)DISPLAY SET  
B)MEMORY GUARD  
C)PARAM. INI  
D)MULTI ZONE  
E)XM RADIO SET  
Features  
Page  
83  
Adjusts the brightness of the display.  
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.  
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.  
83  
83  
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.  
Displays the current reception level of the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory.  
83  
83  
Note  
The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. model.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET MENU  
Using SET MENU  
Use the remote control to access and adjust each  
parameter.  
2
Press u/ dto select “MANUAL SETUP” and  
then press ENTER.  
PRESET/CH  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
ENTER  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
5
6
7
8
TUNER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
V-AUX  
DVR  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
1
1,7  
2-6  
SRCH MODE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
DISPLAY  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
MUTE  
.
MANUAL SETUP  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.  
“1 SOUND MENU” appears in the front panel  
display.  
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is  
reproducing sound.  
• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons  
during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”  
operation is canceled.  
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each  
parameter setting.  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
• To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.  
Note  
1 SOUND MENU  
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when  
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night  
listening mode (see page 32).  
4
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press  
ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.  
The following menus appear in the front panel  
display as you press u/ drepeatedly.  
1
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET  
MENU”.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.  
AMP  
SET MENU  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SOURCE  
MENU  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
SRCH MODE  
TV  
1 SOUND MENU  
2 INPUT MENU  
.
BASIC SETUP  
3 OPTION MENU  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MENU  
5
Press u/ drepeatedly and then press  
ENTER to select and enter the desired  
submenu.  
7
Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items  
you want to adjust.  
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.  
Memory back-up  
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data  
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.  
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power  
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the  
power supply is cut off for more than one week.  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
6
Press u/ dto select the desired parameter  
and then j/ ito change the parameter  
settings.  
• Press ito increase the value.  
• Press jto decrease the value.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SET MENU  
Surround left/right speakers SUR. LR  
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG  
1 SOUND MENU  
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or  
compensate for video signal processing delays when using  
LCD monitors or projectors.  
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround  
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP  
mode (see page 42) and “ SUR. B” is automatically set  
to “NONE” (see below). The low-frequency signals of  
the surround left and right channels are directed to the  
speakers selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 79).  
Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left  
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency  
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the  
surround left and right channels are directed to the  
speakers selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 79).  
Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left  
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency  
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are  
directed to the surround left and right speakers.  
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET  
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.  
•
•
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,  
you can change these settings according to your preference.  
Front speakers FRONT  
Choices: SMALL, LARGE  
•
Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front  
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals  
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left  
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected  
in BASS OUT.  
Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front  
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals  
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals  
are directed to the front left and right speakers.  
Surround back speakers SUR. B  
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG  
•
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a  
surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of  
the surround back channel are directed to the speakers  
selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 79), and the rest of  
the surround back channel signals are directed to the  
surround left and right speakers.  
Note  
If “BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 79), the LFE signals  
found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals  
of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals  
of other speakers set to “SML” or to “NONE” are all directed to  
the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT”  
setting.  
•
•
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround  
back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency  
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the  
surround back channel are directed to the speakers  
selected in “BASS OUT” (see page 79).  
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back  
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals  
effectively. All the surround back channel signals are  
directed to the surround back speaker.  
Center speaker CENTER  
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG  
•
•
•
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center  
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the center  
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “BASS  
OUT” (see page 79), and the rest of the center channel  
signals are directed to the front left and right speakers.  
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center  
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals  
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center  
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “BASS  
OUT” (see page 79).  
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker  
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All  
the center channel signals are directed to the center  
speaker.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
SET MENU  
LFE/Bass out BASS OUT  
■ Speaker level B) SP LEVEL  
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE  
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.  
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH  
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels  
between the front left or surround left speakers and each  
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 78). The  
selected speaker outputs test tone and the speaker  
indicator of the speaker flashes.  
•
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a  
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-  
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”  
(or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the  
subwoofer.  
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB  
Control step: 1.0 dB  
•
Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a  
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals  
of the front left and right channels, and the low-  
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” or to  
“NONE” are all directed to the front left and right  
speakers regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see  
page 78).  
Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.  
The low-frequency signals of any source are output  
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the  
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”  
or to “NONE” are directed to the subwoofer. The low-  
frequency signals of the front left and right channels  
are directed to the front left and right speakers  
regardless of the “FRONT” setting (see page 78).  
Initial setting: 0 dB  
The following is an example where “FL” is selected to  
adjust the balance of the front left speaker.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
SL  
C
R
SR  
FL ----||----  
•
Flashes  
•
•
Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left  
speaker.  
Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right  
speaker.  
•
•
Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.  
Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left  
speaker.  
Crossover CROSSOVER  
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the  
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in  
“SPEAKER SET” (see page 78). All frequencies below  
the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to  
the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER  
SET” (see page 78).  
•
•
•
Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right  
speaker.  
Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back  
speaker.  
Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.  
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,  
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz  
Note  
“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if  
“CENTER” (see page 78), “SUR. LR” (see page 78), “SUR. B”  
(see page 78) and “BASS OUT” (see page 79) are set to “NONE”  
respectively.  
Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE  
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if  
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.  
Choices: NRM, REV  
•
Select “NRM” if you do not want to reverse the phase  
of your subwoofer.  
•
Select “REV” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SET MENU  
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE  
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each  
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.  
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the  
main listening position. However, this is not possible in  
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay  
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all  
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same  
time.  
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ  
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band  
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic  
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of  
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You  
can make adjustments while listening to the currently  
selected source component or a test tone.  
Control range: –6 to +6 dB  
Control step: 0.5 dB  
Initial setting: 0 dB  
Unit UNIT  
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)  
Initial setting:  
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)  
[Other models]: meters (m)  
y
Press u/ dto select a frequency band and j/ ito adjust the  
selected frequency band.  
•
•
Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.  
Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.  
Following is an example where “100 Hz” is selected as the  
frequency band.  
Speaker distances  
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)  
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
100Hz--||-- 0  
dB  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front  
left speaker.  
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front  
right speaker.  
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center  
speaker.  
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround  
left speaker.  
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround  
right speaker.  
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround  
back speaker.  
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)  
Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.  
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)  
Test tone TEST  
Choices: OFF, ON  
•
Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently  
selected source component.  
Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and  
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the  
center speaker.  
•
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL  
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-  
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of  
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries  
low-frequency special effects which are only added to  
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit  
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.  
Control range: –20 to 0 dB  
Control step: 1 dB  
Speaker SP LFE  
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.  
Note  
Headphone HP LFE  
“CENTER”, “SUR. L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR. B” and “SWFR”  
cannot be adjusted if “CENTER” (see page 78), “SUR. LR” (see  
page 78), “SUR. B” (see page 78) and “BASS OUT” (see  
page 79) are set to “NONE” respectively.  
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.  
Note  
Depending on the settings of “BASS OUT” (see page 79), some  
signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SET MENU  
■ Dynamic range F)D. RANGE  
2 INPUT MENU  
Use this menu to reassign the input jacks, select the input  
mode or rename the input source.  
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range  
compression to be applied to your speakers or  
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is  
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.  
■ Input assignment  
A)INPUT ASSIGN  
Speaker SP D.R  
Adjusts the speaker compression.  
Use this feature to assign the input jacks according to the  
component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do  
not correspond to your needs. Change the following  
parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively  
connect more components.  
Once the input jacks are reassigned, you can select the  
corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on  
the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote  
control).  
Headphone HP D.R  
Adjusts the headphone compression.  
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX  
•
Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low  
volume levels.  
•
•
Select “STD” (standard) for general use.  
Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest  
amount of dynamic range.  
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET  
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this  
unit.  
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C  
C.V[A]  
C.V[B]  
C.V[C]  
Muting type MUTE TYP.  
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function  
reduces the output volume (see page 32).  
Choices: FULL, –20dB  
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR  
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR  
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR  
•
Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio  
output.  
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.  
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1and 2  
IN (1)  
•
IN (2)  
Choices: (1) CD, MD/CDR, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,  
Audio delay A.DELAY  
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize  
it with the video image. This may be necessary when  
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.  
Control range: 0 to 160 ms  
DVR  
(2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,  
DVR  
Control step: 1 ms  
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 3 COAXIAL IN (3)  
Choices: (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,  
DVR  
Tone bypass TC.BYPASS  
Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses  
tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are  
set to 0 dB (see page 31).  
Notes  
Choices: AUTO, OFF  
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same  
type of jack.  
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT  
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority  
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT  
(COAXIAL) jack.  
•
•
Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone  
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.  
Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone  
control circuitry.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SET MENU  
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE  
Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”  
back to “AUTO” (see page 33) regardless of the previous  
setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,  
or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on  
this unit.  
3
Press u/ dto select the character you want  
to use and then press j/ ito move to the  
next space.  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
Choices: AUTO, LAST  
•
Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to  
“AUTO” (see page 33) regardless of the previous  
setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit  
automatically selects input signals in the following  
order:  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
(1) Digital signals  
(2) Analog signals  
Notes  
•
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall  
the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)  
used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.  
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.  
• Press dto change the character in the following order, or  
press uto go in the reverse order:  
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,  
*, –, +, etc.)  
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME  
Use this feature to change the name of the input source  
that appears in the front panel display.  
4
5
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each  
input source.  
The following is an example where “DVD” is renamed  
“My DVD”.  
Press SET MENU on the remote control to  
exit from “INPUT RENAME”.  
DVR V-AUX  
DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R  
TUNER  
CD XM  
VOLUME  
dB  
SP  
A
L
SL  
C
R
SR  
SET MENU  
MENU  
DVD My DVD  
SRCH MODE  
1
2
Press one of the input selector buttons on  
the remote control to select the input source  
you want to change the name of.  
■ Volume Trim D)VOLUME TRIM  
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at  
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of  
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume  
when switching between input sources.  
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,  
V-AUX, DVR  
Control range: –6.0 to 6.0 dB  
Control step: 1.0 dB  
Initial setting: 0.0 dB  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
Set the component selector switch to AMP  
and then press j/ ion the remote control to  
place the “_” (underscore) under the space  
or the character you want to edit.  
PRESET/CH  
AMP  
SOURCE  
ENTER  
TV  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SET MENU  
■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE  
Use this feature to specify the location of speakers  
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.  
3 OPTION MENU  
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.  
Speaker B setting SP B  
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET  
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers  
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.  
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B  
Dimmer DIMMER  
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel  
display.  
Control range: –4 to 0  
Control step: 1  
•
Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B  
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B  
terminals are set in the main zone.  
•
Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the  
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If  
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is  
turned on, all the speakers in the main zone are muted  
and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B  
terminals only.  
•
•
Press jto make the front panel display dimmer.  
Press ito make the front panel display brighter.  
■ Memory guard B) MEMORY GUARD  
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP  
program parameter values and other system settings.  
Choices: OFF, ON  
Notes  
•
Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”  
feature.  
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the  
sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B  
terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.  
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,  
this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode  
(see page 42).  
•
Select “ON” to protect:  
– DSP program parameters  
– All “SET MENU” items  
– All speaker levels  
Note  
■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET  
(U.S.A model only)  
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select  
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.  
XM Radio antenna XM ANT.  
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI  
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound  
field program within a sound field program group. When  
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the  
parameter values within that group revert to their initial  
factory settings.  
Press the corresponding sound field program selector  
buttons on the remote control to select the sound field  
program that you want to initialize.  
Use this feature to check the current reception level of the  
XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory  
connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 51). For  
the best reception, orient the XM Connect-and-Play digital  
antenna accessory so that a value of 60% or more is  
displayed here.  
Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%  
Notes  
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,  
MOVIE THEATER, STANDAND  
•
“NONE” is displayed if the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna  
accessory is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the  
antenna connections (see page 51).  
• The “ XM ANT.” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the  
remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the  
XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connected to  
the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception  
level.  
Notes  
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter  
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.  
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field  
programs.  
XM Radio information display scroll SCROLL  
Use this feature to set whether to display the XM Satellite  
Radio information in the front panel display in continuous  
manner pr by 14 alphanumeric characters at once (see  
page 60).  
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when  
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”.  
Choices: CONT, ONCE  
•
Select “CONT” to display the XM Satellite Radio  
information in the front panel display in a continuous  
manner.  
•
Select “ONCE” to display the XM Satellite Radio  
information in the front panel display by 14  
alphanumeric characters at once.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
ADVANCED SETUP  
ADVANCED SETUP  
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional  
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each  
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.  
Notes  
• The settings you make are reflected next time you turn on this unit by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the  
remote control) (see page 26).  
• Only STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons are effective while you are using the advanced  
setup menu.  
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.  
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the  
front panel repeatedly to select the  
parameter you want to adjust.  
The name of the selected parameter appears in the  
front panel display.  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
See page 85 for a complete list of available  
parameters.  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
l
PROGRAM  
h
1,2,5  
3
2,4  
1
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set  
this unit to the standby mode.  
Currently selected  
parameter  
Currently selected  
parameter setting  
STANDBY  
/ON  
SP IMP.-8 MIN  
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the  
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to  
turn on this unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
4
5
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front  
panel repeatedly to change the selected  
parameter setting.  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
While holding  
down  
STRAIGHT  
STANDBY  
/ON  
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
save the new setting and set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
EFFECT  
STANDBY  
/ON  
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on  
this unit.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCED SETUP  
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.  
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit  
so that it matches that of your speakers.  
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN  
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP  
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote  
control recognition (see page 89).  
Choices: ID1, ID2  
•
Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.  
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library  
•
Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω.  
code is set to “00001”.  
•
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library  
code is set to “00002”.  
SP IMP.  
Speaker  
Impedance level  
Note  
If you use one set (A or B),  
the impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 Ω or  
higher.  
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library  
code for the remote control (see page 89).  
Front  
■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN  
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for  
remote control recognition (see page 89).  
Choices: ID1, ID2  
If you use two sets (A and  
B), the impedance of each  
speaker must be 16 Ω or  
8ΩMIN  
*
higher.  
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID  
library code is set to “81916”.  
Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID  
library code is set to “81917”.  
Center  
Surround  
The impedance of each  
speaker must be 8 Ω or  
higher.  
•
Surround back  
Note  
If you use one set (A or B),  
the impedance of each  
speaker must be 6 Ω or  
higher.  
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library  
code for the remote control (see page 89).  
■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM  
(U.S.A. model only)  
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote  
control recognition (see page 90).  
Choices: ID1, ID2  
Front  
If you use two sets (A and  
B), the impedance of each  
speaker must be 12 Ω or  
higher.  
6ΩMIN  
•
Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library  
code is set to “81918”.  
Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library  
code is set to “81919”.  
Center  
Surround  
The impedance of each  
speaker must be 6 Ω or  
higher.  
•
Surround back  
Note  
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems  
You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library  
code for the remote control (see page 89).  
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.  
■ Factory presets PRESET  
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to  
the initial factory settings (see page 91).  
Choices: CANCEL, RESET  
■ Tuner frequency step TU  
(Asia and General models only)  
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according  
to the frequency spacing in your area.  
•
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this  
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50  
unit.  
•
•
Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South  
America.  
Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.  
•
Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.  
Notes  
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit  
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the  
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.  
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on  
this unit.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA  
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for  
each input source (see page 88).  
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components  
■ Controlling this unit  
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this  
unit.  
■ Controlling a TV  
Set the component selector switch to TV to control your  
TV. To control your YV, you must set the appropriate  
remote control code for DTV/CBL or  
(see page 88).  
When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/  
CBL and  
CBL.  
, priority is given to the one set for DTV/  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
AV  
AV  
MD  
SLEEP  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
TUNER  
TUNER  
*1  
V-AUX  
DVR  
V-AUX  
DVR  
*1  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
STEREO  
1
MUSIC  
2
ENTERTAIN  
3
MOVIE  
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
10  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
ENT.  
9
0
ENT.  
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
*2  
*2  
PRESET/CH  
PRESET/CH  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
SRCH MODE  
SRCH MODE  
ENTER  
ENTER  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
DISC SKIP  
DISC SKIP  
(U.S.A. model)  
(U.S.A. model)  
Notes  
Notes  
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the  
component selector switch position.  
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the  
component selector switch position.  
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component  
selector switch is set to AMP.  
Remote control  
Digital TV/Cable TV  
TV POWER  
Turns on or off the power.  
Increases or decreases the volume  
level.  
TV VOL +/–  
TV CH +/–  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
Changes the channel number.  
Mutes the audio output.  
Changes the input source.  
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the component  
selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/  
Cable TV” column on page 87.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
■ Controlling other components  
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control  
other components selected with the input selector buttons,  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
1
2
3
4
, or  
. You must set the appropriate remote control  
1
POWER  
TV  
POWER  
STANDBY  
POWER  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
AV  
5
6
7
8
2
code for each input source (see page 88). The following  
table shows the function of each control button used to  
control other components assigned to each input selector  
MD  
SLEEP  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
7
8
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
EFFECT  
PRESET/CH  
TUNER  
LEVEL  
TITLE  
BAND  
SET MENU  
MENU  
button,  
, and  
. Be advised that some buttons may  
3
4
SRCH MODE  
V-AUX  
DVR  
not correctly operate the selected component.  
ENTER  
AMP  
SOURCE  
TV  
A-E/CAT.  
A-E/CAT.  
RETURN  
XM MEMORY  
REC  
DISPLAY  
9
5
6
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOLUME  
MUTE  
AUDIO  
DISC SKIP  
TV MUTE  
TV INPUT  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
(U.S.A. model)  
Remote  
control  
DVD player/  
recorder  
Digital TV/  
Cable TV  
MD/CD  
recorder  
VCR  
LD player  
CD player  
Tuner  
Power *1  
Power *1  
Power *2  
Power *1  
Power *1  
Power *1  
Power *1  
1
2
AV POWER  
1-9, 0, +10  
Preset stations  
(1-8)  
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons  
Title  
Band  
3
4
TITLE  
PRESET/  
CH u  
Up  
VCR channel up Up  
VCR channel  
Preset up (1-8)  
PRESET/  
CH d  
Down  
Down  
Preset down (1-8)  
down  
Preset down  
(A-E)  
A-E/CAT. j Left  
Left  
A-E/CAT. i Right  
Right  
Enter  
Return  
Preset up (A-E)  
ENTER  
Enter  
Return  
5
6
RETURN  
Disc skip (player)  
Rec (recorder) *3  
REC/  
DISC SKIP  
Rec *3  
Play  
Rec *2*3  
Play *2  
Disc skip  
Play  
Rec *3  
Play  
p
Play  
Play  
Search  
backward *2  
w
Search backward Search backward  
Search backward Search backward Search backward  
Search  
forward *2  
f
Search forward  
Search forward  
Search forward  
Search forward  
Search forward  
AUDIO  
e
Audio  
Audio  
Audio *2  
Pause *2  
Sound  
Pause  
Pause  
Pause  
Pause  
Pause  
b
a
s
Skip backward  
Skip forward  
Stop  
Skip backward  
Skip forward  
Stop  
Skip backward *2 Skip backward  
Skip forward *2 Skip forward  
Skip backward  
Skip forward  
Stop  
Skip backward  
Skip forward  
Stop  
Stop *2  
Enter  
Stop  
Title/Index  
Enter  
Chapter/Time  
Index  
Index  
7
8
9
ENT.  
Menu  
Menu  
MENU  
DISPLAY  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Display  
Notes  
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.  
*2 These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 88).  
*3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
Setting remote control codes  
1
Press one of the input selector buttons or  
to select the component you want to  
set up.  
/
You can control your TV and other components by setting  
the appropriate remote control code for each input source.  
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer  
to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of  
this manual.  
MD  
SLEEP  
CD  
DVD  
CD-R  
XM  
CBL  
DTV  
MULTI CH IN  
TUNER  
The following table shows the default component in the  
“Library” (component category) column and the remote  
control code for each input source.  
V-AUX  
DVR  
Remote Control Code Default Settings  
2
3
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a  
similar object.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
Library  
(component  
category)  
Input  
source  
Default  
code  
Manufacturer  
CD  
MD/CD-R  
XM  
CD  
MD  
TUNER  
DVD  
–
YAMAHA  
61907  
70888  
81918  
40539  
–
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
YAMAHA  
Flashes  
YAMAHA  
DVD  
YAMAHA  
Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter  
the five-digit remote control code for the  
component to be used.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the  
selected component is set.  
DTV/CBL  
TUNER  
V-AUX  
DVR  
–
TUNER  
–
YAMAHA  
81916  
–
–
DVR  
–
YAMAHA  
51544  
–
–
–
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
TRANSMIT  
–
–
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
Flashes  
Note  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even  
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.  
In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.  
EFFECT  
y
Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the  
end of this manual.  
Notes  
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one  
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.  
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step  
3, the setup procedure is canceled. If this happens, repeat  
the setup procedure.  
• If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control  
code previously set for the selected component is cleared.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library  
Setting library codes  
codes  
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control  
TUNER ID library code for the component you want to  
use.  
You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or  
amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote  
control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to  
select and operate the desired component with the  
supplied remote control.  
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input  
source.  
■ Setting remote control AMP ID library  
codes  
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control  
AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.  
TUNER  
1
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a  
similar object.  
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a  
similar object.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
Flashes  
Flashes  
2
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code  
number “00001” or “00002”.  
3
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code  
number “81916” or “81917”.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is  
changed.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is  
changed.  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
1
2
3
4
TRANSMIT  
5
6
7
8
TRANSMIT  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
5
6
7
8
9
0
10  
ENT.  
Flashes  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
Flashes  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
EFFECT  
AMP ID  
librarycode  
*1  
Remote  
control AMP  
ID *2  
Function  
To operate this unit using  
TUNER ID  
librarycode  
*1  
Remote  
control  
TUNER ID *2  
Function  
00001  
ID1  
(initial setting) the default code.  
To operate this unit using  
an alternative code.  
(initial setting)  
81916  
To operate this unit using  
ID1  
(initial setting)  
(initial setting) the default code.  
To operate this unit using  
an alternative code.  
00002  
ID2  
81917  
ID2  
*1 The remote control setting  
*1 The remote control setting  
*2 The setting of this unit (see page 85)  
*2 The setting of this unit (see page 85)  
Notes  
Notes  
• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID  
of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 85).  
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you  
may be able to operate the other components  
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,  
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit  
separately.  
• You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER  
ID of this unit in the advanced setup(see page 85).  
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you  
may be able to operate the other components  
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,  
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit  
separately.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES  
■ Setting remote control XM ID library  
codes (U.S.A. model only)  
Select one oF the following codes to set the remote control  
XM ID library code for the component you want to use.  
Resetting all remote control codes  
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes  
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory  
settings.  
1
Press XM to select “XM” as the input source.  
1
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a  
similar object.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
XM  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
2
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a  
similar object.  
Flashes  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice.  
2
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code  
number “9981”.  
TRANSMIT  
CODE SET  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes  
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial  
factory settings.  
Flashes  
3
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code  
number “81918” or “81919”.  
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control  
flashes twice, and the XM ID library code is changed.  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
1
2
3
4
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
TRANSMIT  
5
6
7
8
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
STEREO  
MUSIC  
ENTERTAIN  
MOVIE  
Flashes  
1
2
3
4
EFFECT  
TRANSMIT  
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST.  
5
6
7
8
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step  
2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the  
clearing procedure.  
SPEAKERS  
ENHANCER  
NIGHT  
STRAIGHT  
Flashes  
9
0
10  
ENT.  
EFFECT  
XM ID  
librarycode  
*1  
Remote  
control XM  
ID *2  
Function  
To operate this unit using  
81918  
ID1  
(initial setting) the default code.  
To operate this unit using  
an alternative code.  
(initial setting)  
81919  
ID2  
*1 The remote control setting  
*2 The setting of this unit (see page 85)  
Notes  
• You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID  
of this unit in the advanced setup(see page 85).  
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you  
may be able to operate the other components  
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,  
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit  
separately.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
RESETTING THE SYSTEM  
RESETTING THE SYSTEM  
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.  
Notes  
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup  
menu parameters will not be initialized.  
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.  
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY  
on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode.  
(U.S.A. model)  
3
Press the PROGRAM l/ hbuttons on the  
front panel to select “PRESET”.  
VOLUME  
STANDBY  
/ON  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PRESET/TUNING  
SEARCH MODE  
FM/AM  
A/B/C/D/E  
CATEGORY  
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH  
h
MEMORY  
TUNING MODE  
DISPLAY  
EDIT  
NEXT  
LEVEL  
MAN'L/AUTO FM  
AUTO/MAN'L  
INPUT  
STRAIGHT  
l
PROGRAM  
h
PHONES  
SPEAKERS  
VIDEO AUX  
A
B
INPUT MODE  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
EFFECT  
TONE CONTROL  
BASS/TREBLE  
SILENT CINEMA  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
PORTABLE  
1-2,5  
3
2,4  
PRESET-CANCEL  
1
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set  
this unit to the standby mode.  
4
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front  
panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.  
STRAIGHT  
EFFECT  
STANDBY  
/ON  
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the  
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to  
turn on this unit.  
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu  
appears in the front panel display.  
PRESET-RESET  
y
While holding  
down  
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure  
without making any changes.  
STRAIGHT  
STANDBY  
/ON  
EFFECT  
5
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to  
confirm your selection and set this unit to the  
standby mode.  
STANDBY  
/ON  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below  
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the  
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.  
■ General  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
This unit fails to turn  
on or enters the  
standby mode soon  
after the power is  
turned on.  
The power cable is not connected or the  
plug is not completely inserted.  
Connect the power cable firmly.  
—
The speaker impedance setting is  
incorrect.  
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.  
25  
13  
The protection circuitry has been  
activated.  
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this  
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire  
for each connection does not touch anything other  
than its respective connection.  
This unit has been exposed to a strong  
external electric shock (such as lightning  
or strong static electricity).  
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the  
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then  
use it normally.  
—
No sound  
Incorrect input or output cable  
connections.  
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,  
the cables may be defective.  
18-24  
33  
“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or  
“ANALOG”.  
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.  
No appropriate input source has been  
selected.  
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT  
selector on the front panel (or the input selector  
buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH  
INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the  
remote control).  
30, 37  
Speaker connections are not secure.  
Secure the connections.  
13  
30  
The front speakers to be used have not  
been selected properly.  
Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A/B  
on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote  
control.  
The volume is turned down.  
The sound is muted.  
Turn up the volume.  
—
32  
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control  
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.  
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”  
while playing a source encoded in DTS.  
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.  
33  
—
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are  
being input from a source component,  
such as a CD-ROM.  
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this  
unit.  
No picture  
The output and input for the picture are  
connected to different types of video  
jacks.  
Connect your video source components in the same  
way as you connect your video monitor to this unit.  
19  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The sound suddenly  
goes off.  
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.  
25  
—
because of a short circuit, etc.  
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each  
other and then turn this unit back on.  
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.  
The sound is muted.  
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.  
—
32  
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control  
to resume audio output.  
Sound is heard from  
the speaker on one  
side only.  
Incorrect cable connections.  
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,  
the cables may be defective.  
18-24  
79  
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER  
LEVEL”.  
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.  
Only the center  
speaker outputs  
substantial sound.  
When playing a monaural source with a  
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal  
is directed to the center channel, and the  
front and surround speakers output effect  
sounds.  
No sound is heard  
from the center  
speaker.  
“CENTER” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“NONE”.  
Set “CENTER” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
78  
62  
78  
37  
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for Try another sound field program.  
6ch Stereo) has been selected.  
No sound is heard  
from the surround  
speakers.  
“SUR. LR” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“NONE”.  
Set “SUR. LR” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode  
and a monaural source is being played  
back.  
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so  
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel  
display.  
No sound is heard  
from the surround  
back speaker.  
“SUR. LR” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“NONE” and “SUR. B” is automatically  
set to “NONE”.  
Set “SUR. LR” and “SUR. B” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
78  
“SUR. B” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“NONE”.  
Set “SUR. B” to “SML” or “LRG”.  
78  
79  
No sound is heard  
from the subwoofer.  
“BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS  
signal is being played.  
Set “BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.  
“BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to  
“SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel  
source is being played.  
Set “BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.  
79  
The source does not contain low-  
frequency bass signals.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Dolby Digital or DTS  
sources cannot be  
played. (Dolby Digital  
or DTS indicator in  
the front panel  
The connected component is not set to  
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital  
signals.  
Make an appropriate setting following the operating  
instructions for your component.  
—
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”.  
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.  
33  
display does not light  
up.)  
A humming sound is  
heard.  
Incorrect cable connections.  
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem  
persists, the cables may be defective.  
—
—
The volume level  
cannot be increased,  
or the sound is  
distorted.  
The component connected to the AUDIO  
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned  
off.  
Turn on the power of the component.  
The sound effect  
cannot be recorded.  
It is not possible to record the sound effect  
with a recording component.  
A source cannot be  
recorded by an  
analog component  
connected to the  
AUDIO OUT (REC)  
jacks.  
The source component is not connected to Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO  
19-21  
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.  
IN jacks.  
The sound field  
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”  
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.  
83  
—
parameters and some is set to “ON”.  
other settings of this  
unit cannot be  
changed.  
This unit does not  
operate properly.  
The internal microcomputer has been  
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet  
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.  
frozen by an external electric shock (such  
as lightning or excessive static electricity)  
or by a power supply with low voltage.  
“CHECK SP WIRES”  
appears in the front  
panel display.  
Speaker cables are short-circuited.  
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.  
13  
—
There is noise  
interference from  
digital or radio  
This unit is too close to the digital or high- Move this unit further away from such equipment.  
frequency equipment.  
frequency equipment.  
The picture is  
disturbed.  
The video source uses scrambled or  
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.  
This unit suddenly  
enters the standby  
mode.  
The internal temperature becomes too  
high and the overheat protection circuitry  
has been activated.  
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then  
turn it back on.  
—
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
■ Tuner  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
FM stereo reception is  
noisy.  
The characteristics of FM stereo  
broadcasts may cause this problem  
when the transmitter is too far away or  
the antenna input is poor.  
Check the antenna connections.  
23  
Try using a high-quality directional FM  
antenna.  
—
Use the manual tuning method.  
45  
—
There is distortion, and  
clear reception cannot  
be obtained even with a  
good FM antenna.  
There is multi-path interference.  
The signal is too weak.  
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate  
multi-path interference.  
FM  
The desired station  
cannot be tuned into  
with the automatic  
tuning method.  
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.  
Use the manual tuning method.  
—
45  
Previously preset  
stations can no longer  
be tuned into.  
This unit has been disconnected for a  
long period.  
Set preset stations  
46, 47  
—
The desired station  
cannot be tuned into  
with the automatic  
tuning method.  
The signal is weak or the antenna  
connections are loose.  
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections  
and orient it for the best reception.  
Use the manual tuning method.  
45  
—
AM  
There are continuous  
crackling and hissing  
noises.  
Noises result from lightning,  
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats  
and other electrical equipment.  
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.  
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to  
eliminate all noise.  
There are buzzing and  
whining noises.  
A TV set is being used nearby.  
Move this unit away from the TV set.  
—
■
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)  
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel  
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.  
See  
page  
Status message  
Cause  
Remedy  
The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna  
51  
CHECK ANTENNA  
is not connected to the XM jack of this  
unit or does not work properly.  
accessory connections and orient it for the best  
reception level.  
The XM user encryption code is being  
updated.  
Wait until the encryption code is updated.  
—
51  
UPDATING  
The signal is too weak.  
Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna  
accessory connections and orient it for the best  
reception level.  
NO SIGNAL  
It takes longer than four seconds for audio Wait until the decoding process has finished.  
or text data to be decoded.  
—
—
LOADING  
OFF AIR  
The XM Satellite Radio channel you  
selected is not currently broadcasting any  
signals.  
Check the channel number again or select another  
XM Satellite Radio channel.  
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer  
available.  
<XM> - - -  
No artist name or song title is available.  
- - - / - - -  
<CAT> - - -  
No channels are available for the selected  
category.  
Select another channel category by pressing  
CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j/ ion  
the remote control) repeatedly.  
56  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING  
■ Remote control  
See  
page  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
The remote control  
does not work nor  
function properly.  
Wrong distance or angle.  
The remote control functions within a maximum  
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-  
axis from the front panel.  
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an  
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is  
striking the remote control sensor of this  
unit.  
Reposition this unit.  
—
The batteries are weak.  
Replace all batteries.  
3
The remote control code is not correctly  
set.  
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF  
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this  
manual.  
88  
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer  
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at  
the end of this manual.  
88  
The library code of the remote control and Match the remote control ID of this unit with the  
85, 89  
the remote control ID of this unit do not  
match.  
corresponding remote control library code.  
Even if the remote control code is  
correctly set, there are some models that  
do not respond to the remote control.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GLOSSARY  
GLOSSARY  
■ Dolby Surround  
Audio information  
■ Dolby Digital  
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system  
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front  
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog  
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound  
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces  
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is  
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,  
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby  
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital  
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the  
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects  
and directionality.  
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives  
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3  
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround  
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio  
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass  
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system  
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1  
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround  
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and  
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby  
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to  
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels  
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital  
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented  
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound  
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel  
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.  
■ DTS 96/24  
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality  
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully  
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers  
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz  
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/  
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24  
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-  
motion video for music programs and motion picture  
soundtracks on DVD video.  
■ Dolby Digital EX  
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output  
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a  
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the  
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby  
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks  
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this  
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and  
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-  
over” and “fly-around” effects.  
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)  
Digital Surround  
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog  
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound  
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie  
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.  
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy  
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of  
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces  
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,  
front left and right, center, surround left and right and LFE  
0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This  
unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-  
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel  
to the existing 5.1-channel format.  
■ Dolby Pro Logic II  
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to  
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.  
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel  
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center  
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of  
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic  
technology. There are three modes available: “Music  
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie  
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.  
■ ITU-R  
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU  
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R  
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used  
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering  
purposes.  
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete  
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel  
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”  
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for  
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game  
sources.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GLOSSARY  
■ LFE 0.1 channel  
Video information  
■ Component video signal  
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The  
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.  
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a  
low-frequency range compared to the full-range  
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or  
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.  
With the component video signal system, the video signal  
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB  
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be  
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each  
of these signals is independent. The component signal is  
also called the “color difference signal” because the  
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A  
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to  
output component signals.  
■ Neo:6  
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-  
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables  
playback with the full-range channels with higher  
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There  
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources  
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.  
■ Composite video signal  
With the composite video signal system, the video signal  
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:  
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite  
video jack on a video component transmits these three  
elements combined.  
■ Neural Surround  
™
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in  
surround technology and has been adopted by XM  
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround  
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural  
■ S-video signal  
™
Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain  
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally  
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted  
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the  
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the  
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss  
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful  
images.  
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound  
stage with superior channel separation and localization of  
audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to  
7.1 multi-channel surround playback.  
■ PCM (Linear PCM)  
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog  
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without  
using any compression. This is used as a method of  
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a  
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per  
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code  
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and  
then modulated for recording.  
■ Sampling frequency and number of  
quantized bits  
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of  
times the signal is sampled per second is called the  
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when  
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called  
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can  
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,  
while the dynamic range representing the sound level  
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.  
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider  
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the  
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the  
sound level can be reproduced.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GLOSSARY  
Sound field program information  
■ CINEMA DSP  
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were  
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect  
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for  
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room  
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can  
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in  
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured  
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original  
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,  
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual  
experience of movie theater in the listening room of your  
own home.  
■ SILENT CINEMA  
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect  
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for  
headphones have been set for each sound field so that  
accurate representations of all the sound field programs  
can be enjoyed on headphones.  
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP  
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP  
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field  
surround effects even without any surround speakers by  
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to  
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker  
system that does not include a center speaker.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
SPECIFICATIONS  
AUDIO SECTION  
VIDEO SECTION  
• Video Signal Type .......................................................... PAL/NTSC  
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,  
Surround back  
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................. 50 dB or more  
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 90 W  
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)  
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)  
Component .............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB  
[Asia, China, Korea and General models]  
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 130 W  
FM SECTION  
• Tuning Range  
• Dynamic Power (IHF)  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz  
[Asia and General models] ....... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz  
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz  
8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 120/155/190/235 W  
• Maximum Output Power [Europe model]  
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 140 W  
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)  
• IEC Output Power [Europe and Asia models]  
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)  
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 100 W  
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB  
• Damping Factor (IHF)  
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)  
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 120 or more  
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%  
• Frequency Response  
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB  
• Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB  
CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB  
• Total Harmonic Distortion  
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 Ω)  
................................................................................ 0.06% or less  
AM SECTION  
• Tuning Range  
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz  
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz  
[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz  
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................ 100 dB or more  
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)  
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less  
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m  
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)  
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ......... 60 dB/45 dB or more  
GENERAL  
• Power Supply  
• Tone Control (Front L/R)  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz  
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz  
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz  
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz  
[General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... 10 dB/60 Hz  
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. 10 dB/20 kHz  
• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω  
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance  
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ  
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ  
[Asia model] .................................. AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz  
• Output Level/Output Impedance  
• Power Consumption  
REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ  
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ........................................... 4 V/1.2 kΩ  
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 350 W/440 VA  
[Other models] .................................................................... 360 W  
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less  
• AC Outlets  
[U.K. and Australia models] ............... 1 (Total 100 W maximum)  
[U.S.A., Canada  
and China models] ........................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)  
[Europe, Asia  
and General models] .......................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)  
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 161 x 391 mm  
(17.1 x 6.3 x 15.4 in)  
• Weight .................................................................. 10.5 kg (23.1 lbs)  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES  
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM  
10775, 11005,  
UNIDEN  
10052, 10074,  
10238, 10722,  
10724  
CABLE TV RECEIVER  
CABLE/PVR  
COMBINATION  
AMERICAST 10899  
ABC  
10003, 10008,  
10014, 10017,  
10033  
11170, 11505,  
11775  
US DIGITAL 11535  
DISHPRO  
10775, 11005,  
11505, 11775  
10269, 10280,  
10775, 11005,  
11170, 11505,  
11775  
USDTV  
VOOM  
ZENITH  
11535  
10869  
11856  
DIGEO  
11187  
AMERICAST 10899  
BELL & HOWELL  
10014  
BELL SOUTH 10899  
CLEARMASTER  
10883  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
10476, 10810  
ECHOSTAR  
JERROLD  
10476, 10810  
HDTV DECORDER  
ACCURIAN  
EPSON  
LG  
MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY  
11383  
MOTOROLA 11363  
MYHD  
PANASONIC 11120  
PIONEER 11010  
PRINCETON 10113, 10295  
SAMSUNG  
SASEM  
SENSORY SCIENCE  
11126  
SHARP  
MOTOROLA 10476, 10810,  
11187, 11376  
11653  
11563, 11650  
11415  
EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775  
GE 10392, 10566  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
10869  
PACE  
PIONEER  
RCA  
10237, 11877  
10877, 11877  
11256  
CLEARMAX 10883  
COOLMAX  
DIGEO  
DIGI  
DIRECTOR  
DUMONT  
10883  
11187  
10637  
10476  
10637  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
10877, 11877  
11006  
GOI  
10775, 11775  
GOODMANS 11246  
11383  
SONY  
HISENSE  
HITACHI  
11535  
10819, 11250  
SUPERCABLE  
GENERAL INSTRUMENT  
10003, 10276,  
10276  
11256  
10899  
HOMECABLE 10238  
THOMSON  
ZENITH  
10476, 10810  
HTS  
10775, 11775  
11190, 11490  
11641  
GOLDSTAR  
HAMLIN  
I3 MICRO  
JERROLD  
10144  
10009, 10273  
11602  
10003, 10012,  
10014, 10276,  
10476, 10810  
10033  
HUGHES  
10749, 11442,  
11749  
DBS/PVR  
COMBINATION  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
10749, 11142,  
11010  
11563  
11442, 11443,  
11444, 11749  
SYLVANIA  
TELEMANN 11604  
VIEWSONIC 11329  
DIRECTV  
10099, 10392,  
10639, 11076,  
11142, 11377,  
11392, 11442,  
11443, 11444,  
11640  
MACOM  
ILO  
11535  
MEMOREX  
10000  
IQ  
10210  
VIZIO  
11126  
MOTOROLA 10014, 10276,  
10476, 10810,  
11187, 11254,  
11376  
MULTITECH 10883  
IQ PRISM  
JERROLD  
JVC  
10210  
10869  
10775, 11170,  
11775  
OTHER VIDEO  
ACCESSORIES  
ABS  
ACCURIAN  
ALIENWARE 11272  
CYBERPOWER  
11272  
D-LINK  
ECS  
EPSON  
GATEWAY  
HEWLETT PACKARD  
11267, 11272  
HOWARD COMPUTERS  
11272  
HP  
HUSH  
IBUYPOWER 11272  
INTERVIDEO 11393  
KEYSPAN  
KWORLD  
LEADTEK  
LG  
LINKSYS  
MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY  
11383  
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM  
10775, 11505  
LEGEND  
LG  
10269  
11226, 11414  
11272  
11653  
DISHPRO  
ECHOSTAR  
10775, 11505  
10775, 11170,  
11505  
MYRIO  
PACE  
11602  
10008, 10237,  
11877  
MAGNAVOX 10722, 10724  
MEMOREX 10269, 10724  
MITSUBISHI 10749  
EXPRESSVU 10775  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
11142, 11442,  
PANASONIC 10000, 10107  
PANTHER  
PARAGON  
PHILIPS  
10637  
10000  
10317, 11305  
10144, 10533,  
10877, 11877  
10000  
MOTOROLA 10856, 10869  
11554  
11553  
11563, 11650  
11272  
NEC  
11270  
11443, 11444  
NEXT LEVEL 10869  
PANASONIC 10247, 10701  
JVC  
11170  
PIONEER  
MOTOROLA 10869  
PAYSAT  
PHILIPS  
10724  
PHILIPS  
11142, 11442  
PULSAR  
10099, 10722,  
10724, 10749,  
10819, 11076,  
11142, 11442,  
11749  
PROSCAN  
RCA  
10392  
11392  
QUASAR  
10000  
RADIOSHACK  
SAMSUNG  
SONY  
11442  
10639, 11640  
10883  
11272  
11272  
RCA  
11256  
STAR CHOICE  
REGAL  
RUNCO  
SAMSUNG  
10273, 10279  
10000  
10144  
PIONEER  
11442  
10869  
PROSCAN  
PROTON  
10392, 10566  
11535  
11344  
11403  
11614  
11415  
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA  
10008, 10017,  
RADIOSHACK  
SATELLITE RECEIVER  
10869  
ALPHASTAR 10772  
CHAPARRAL 10053, 10216  
CROSSDIGITAL  
11109  
10477, 10877,  
11877  
RCA  
10143, 10392,  
10566, 10855,  
11392  
11272, 11365  
SEJIN  
11602  
SONY  
11006  
REALISTIC  
SAMSUNG  
10052  
DIRECTV  
10099, 10247,  
10392, 10566,  
10639, 10724,  
10749, 10819,  
11076, 11108,  
11109, 11142,  
11377, 11392,  
11414, 11442,  
11443, 11444,  
11609, 11639,  
11640, 11749,  
11856  
STARCOM  
SUPERCABLE  
10003  
11108, 11109,  
11142, 11276,  
11377, 11442,  
11609  
MEDIA CENTER PC  
11272  
MICROSOFT 11272  
10276  
SUPERMAX 10883  
MIND  
MOTOROLA 11363  
MYHD 11383  
NIVEUS MEDIA  
11272  
NORTHGATE 11272  
PANASONIC 11120  
PINNACLE SYSTEMS  
11268  
11272  
THOMSON  
TOCOM  
TORX  
TOSHIBA  
TRISTAR  
V2  
11256  
10012  
10003  
10000  
10883  
10883  
SANYO  
SONY  
11219  
10639, 11639,  
11640  
STAR CHOICE 10869  
STS  
10210  
TIVO  
11142, 11442,  
11443, 11444  
10082, 10749,  
10790, 10819,  
11285, 11749  
VIEWMASTER10883  
VISION 10883  
VORTEX VIEW10883  
ZENITH 10000, 10525,  
10899  
TOSHIBA  
PIONEER  
PRINCETON 10113, 10295  
RICAVISION 11272  
11010  
ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640  
APPENDIX-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ROKU  
SAMSUNG  
SASEM  
SENSORY SCIENCE  
11126  
SHARP  
SMC  
11486  
11190, 11490  
11641  
CURTIS MATHES  
20030, 20047,  
JCB  
JENSEN  
20000  
PENNEY  
20030, 20047,  
20051, 20060,  
20156, 20178,  
21347, 21919,  
21926  
20030, 20054  
20054, 20690,  
21154, 21454  
20030  
20761, 20815,  
20817, 21933  
20053, 20069,  
20160, 20169,  
20731, 21253  
20180  
20030, 20859  
20765, 20767,  
21962  
20030, 20180  
20178, 20442,  
20700, 20856,  
21178, 21265  
21904  
20054, 20060,  
20093, 20145,  
20154, 20166,  
20451, 20466,  
20702, 21147,  
21347, 21919  
20180  
JVC  
11010  
11456  
11272, 11324,  
11364  
11272  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
KEC  
KENWOOD  
KLH  
SONY  
CXC  
PILOT  
PIONEER  
STACK 9  
STREAMZAP 11309  
SYLVANIA 11563  
SYSTEMAX 11272  
TAGAR SYSTEMS  
11272  
TELEMANN 11604  
TOSHIBA  
TOUCH  
VIEWSONIC 11272, 11329  
VIZIO  
DAEWOO  
20092, 20451,  
20623, 20661,  
20672, 21661,  
21928  
20038, 20166,  
20679, 20866  
20765, 20865  
KTV  
LG  
POLAROID  
PORTLAND 20092  
PRIMA 20761, 20783,  
DELL  
21080, 21178,  
21454  
LLOYD'S  
LOEWE  
LXI  
20815, 20817,  
21933  
DENON  
DUMONT  
20145, 20511  
20017  
20136  
11272  
11272  
20047, 20054,  
20154, 20156,  
20178  
PRINCETON 20700, 20717  
PRISM  
PROSCAN  
DURABRAND 20171, 20178,  
20180, 20463,  
20051  
20047, 20466,  
21347, 21447,  
21922  
20178, 20466  
20017  
11126  
11272  
11272  
21034  
MAGNASONIC  
VOODOO  
ZT GROUP  
DWIN  
20093, 20720,  
20774  
21928  
MAGNAVOX 20030, 20054,  
20706, 20802,  
PROTON  
PULSAR  
QUASAR  
ELECTROBAND  
20000  
ELECTROGRAPH  
21755  
21254, 21454,  
21904, 21931,  
21944  
20030, 20054,  
20704, 20854,  
20855, 21154,  
21454  
20051, 20250,  
20650, 21919  
TV  
ADMIRAL  
ADVENT  
20093, 20463  
20761, 20783,  
20815, 20817,  
20842, 21933  
20092  
RADIOSHACK  
EMERSON  
20038, 20154,  
20171, 20178,  
20180, 20236,  
20451, 20463,  
20623, 21928,  
21929, 21944  
20030, 20813  
20833, 20840  
20171, 20812  
20154  
MARANTZ  
20030, 20047,  
20154, 20178,  
20180, 21904  
20038, 20047,  
20090, 20679,  
21047, 21147,  
21247, 21347,  
21447, 21547,  
21917, 21919,  
21922, 21948,  
21953, 21958  
20030, 20154,  
20178, 20180  
20017, 20030,  
20497, 20603  
20030, 21755  
20030, 20060,  
20178, 20587,  
20702, 20766,  
20812, 20814,  
21060, 21903,  
21959  
20463, 21904,  
21929, 21935  
20088, 20154,  
20484, 20799,  
20893  
20178  
20178, 20180,  
20236  
20047, 20054,  
20154, 20156,  
20171, 20178,  
21904, 21926  
20093, 20153,  
20491, 20688,  
20689, 20818,  
20851, 21917  
AIKO  
AIWA  
AKAI  
RCA  
20701  
MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650  
MAXENT  
MEGAPOWER  
20030, 20060,  
20672, 20702,  
20812, 21903  
21755  
20700  
ENVISION  
EPSON  
ESA  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
ALBATRON 20700, 20843  
AMERICA ACTION  
20180  
AMPRO  
ANAM  
MEGATRON 20145, 20178  
MEMOREX  
20150, 20154,  
20178, 20463,  
21926  
20030, 20150,  
20155, 20178  
20017, 20047,  
20051  
20683, 20809,  
20853  
20751  
20180  
20030  
REALISTIC  
RUNCO  
FUNAI  
20171, 20180,  
21904  
MGA  
AOC  
APEX DIGITAL  
FUTURETECH  
MIDLAND  
20156, 20748,  
20765, 20767,  
20879, 21943  
20092, 20180,  
20451, 20623,  
20802, 20875,  
21937, 21951,  
21952  
20180  
SAMPO  
SAMSUNG  
GATEWAY  
GE  
21755, 21756  
20047, 20051,  
20178, 20451,  
21147, 21347,  
21447, 21917,  
21919, 21922  
MITSUBISHI 20014, 20093,  
20150, 20155,  
AUDIOVOX  
20178, 20331,  
20358, 20836,  
20868, 21250,  
21917  
GIBRALTER 20017, 20030  
GO VIDEO 20886  
GOLDSTAR 20030, 20178,  
21926  
MONIVISION 20700, 20843  
MOTOROLA 20093  
MTC  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
AVENTURA 20171  
AXION 21937  
BELL & HOWELL  
20154  
BENQ  
BOXLIGHT  
BRADFORD 20180  
BROKSONIC 20180, 20236,  
20463, 21929,  
20030, 20060  
MULTITECH 20180  
GOODMANS 20360  
NAD  
NEC  
20156, 20178,  
20866  
21032  
20893  
GRUNDIG  
GRUNPY  
HAIER  
20683  
20180  
21034  
SCOTCH  
SCOTT  
20030, 20497,  
20882, 21704  
21755  
20030, 20092,  
20178  
20748, 20824  
20092  
20180  
20154, 20166,  
20250, 20650  
20887  
20093  
20236, 20463,  
21463, 21929  
HALLMARK 20178  
HARLEY DAVIDSON  
21904  
HARMAN/KARDON  
20054  
NETTV  
NIKKO  
SEARS  
21935, 21938  
20030  
CANDLE  
CARNIVALE 20030  
CARVER 20054  
CELEBRITY 20000  
CELERA  
CHANGHONG  
NORCENT  
NTC  
ONWA  
SHARP  
HARVARD  
HAVERMY  
HELIOS  
20180  
20093  
20865  
OPTIMUS  
20765  
HELLO KITTY  
OPTOMA  
OPTONICA  
ORION  
SHENG CHIA 20093  
SOLE  
SONY  
20765  
20451  
20813  
CITIZEN  
20030, 20060,  
20092, 21928  
20180  
HISENSE  
HITACHI  
20748  
20000, 20011,  
20080, 20111,  
20810, 20834,  
20867, 21100,  
21904, 21925  
20038, 20145,  
20151, 20413,  
21145, 21904,  
21960  
CLARION  
COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS  
20047, 21447  
PANASONIC 20051, 20226,  
20250, 20650,  
20863, 21410,  
CONTEC  
CRAIG  
CROSLEY  
CROWN  
20180  
20180  
20054  
20180  
HYUNDAI  
INFINITY  
INTEQ  
20849  
20054  
20017  
20054  
21919, 21941,  
21946, 21947  
SOUNDESIGN  
SOVA  
20178, 20180  
21952  
JBL  
APPENDIX-ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SQUAREVIEW  
HOWARD COMPUTERS  
31972  
DURABRAND  
MTC  
30240  
20171  
20180  
20180  
30038, 30039  
ELECTROHOME  
30037, 30043  
ELECTROPHONIC  
30037  
MULTITECH 30072  
NEC  
SSS  
STARLITE  
STUDIO EXPERIENCE  
20843  
SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864  
HP  
31972  
30038, 30041,  
30067, 30104  
30037  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
30739  
NIKKO  
HUMAX  
HUSH  
30739  
31972  
NIVEUS MEDIA  
31972  
30240  
NORTHGATE 31972  
EMEREX  
EMERSON  
30032  
SUPREME  
SVA  
20000  
IBUYPOWER 31972  
30002, 30037,  
30043, 30121,  
30184, 30209,  
30278, 30479,  
30593, 31593  
30047, 30104  
30033, 30035  
30593, 31593  
31972  
30035, 30060,  
30240  
30240, 30432  
30037, 30038  
NOBLEX  
20587, 20748,  
20865, 20870,  
20871, 20872  
20030, 20054,  
20171, 21931,  
21944  
LG  
LINKSYS  
32010  
31972  
OLYMPUS  
OPTIMUS  
30035  
MEDIA CENTER PC  
31972  
MICROSOFT 31972  
30037, 30048,  
30104, 30162,  
30432, 30593,  
31048, 31062,  
31162, 31262  
30002, 30184,  
30209, 30479  
SYLVANIA  
FISHER  
FUJI  
FUNAI  
GATEWAY  
GE  
MIND  
NIVEUS MEDIA  
31972  
31972  
SYMPHONIC 20171, 20180,  
21904  
TANDY  
TATUNG  
TECHNICS  
TECHVIEW  
ORION  
20093  
21756  
20051, 20250  
20847  
NORTHGATE 31972  
PANASONIC 30616, 31807,  
31808, 31809  
PANASONIC 30035, 30162,  
30616, 31062,  
GO VIDEO  
GOLDSTAR  
PHILIPS  
RCA  
30618, 30739  
30880  
31162, 31244,  
31262, 31562,  
31807, 31808,  
31809  
30035, 30037,  
30038, 30042,  
30240  
30042  
30035  
30035, 30081,  
30618, 30739,  
31081, 31181  
30037  
TECHWOOD 20051  
TEKNIKA  
HARMAN/KARDON  
30038, 30081  
30072  
20054, 20060,  
20092, 20150,  
20180  
REPLAYTV  
30614, 30616  
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616  
HARWOOD  
SONY  
STACK 9  
30636, 31972  
31972  
HEWLETT PACKARD  
31972  
HI-Q  
HITACHI  
HOWARD COMPUTERS  
31972  
PENNEY  
TELEFUNKEN  
20702  
21904  
20178  
20017  
20060, 20154,  
20156, 20650,  
20832, 20845,  
21156, 21256,  
21265, 21356,  
21656, 21704,  
21918, 21935,  
21936, 21945  
20463  
SYSTEMAX 31972  
TAGAR SYSTEMS  
31972  
30047  
30041, 30042  
THOMAS  
TMK  
TNCI  
PENTAX  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
TIVO  
30618, 30636,  
TOSHIBA  
30739  
HP  
31972  
TOSHIBA  
TOUCH  
31008, 31972  
31972  
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS  
30042, 30739  
HUMAX  
HUSH  
IBUYPOWER 31972  
JENSEN  
JVC  
PILOT  
PIONEER  
VIEWSONIC 31972  
30739, 31988  
31972  
30067  
VOODOO  
ZT GROUP  
31972  
31972  
POLK AUDIO 30081  
PROFITRONIC  
30240  
PROSCAN  
PROTEC  
PULSAR  
QUASAR  
30041  
30041, 30067,  
31162  
30037, 30278  
30038, 30041,  
30067  
30060  
30072  
30039  
30035, 30162,  
31162  
VCR  
TVS  
VECTOR RESEARCH  
20030  
VICTOR  
VIDIKRON  
VIDTECH  
VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864,  
20885, 21755  
ABS  
31972  
KEC  
KENWOOD  
ADMIRAL  
30048, 30209,  
30479  
20053  
20054  
20178  
AIKO  
AIWA  
AKAI  
30278  
30037  
30041  
KLH  
KODAK  
LG  
LINKSYS  
LOGIK  
LXI  
30072  
RADIOSHACK  
30035, 30037  
31037, 32010  
31972  
30072  
30037  
31037  
30037  
30037  
30042, 30060,  
30149, 30240,  
30880  
30035, 30037,  
30047, 30048,  
30104  
RADIX  
RANDEX  
RCA  
ALIENWARE 31972  
AMERICA ACTION  
30278  
AMERICAN HIGH  
30035  
VIZIO  
20864, 20885,  
21756  
20030, 20054,  
20080, 20111,  
20178, 20866,  
21156  
WARDS  
MAGNASONIC  
30593  
REALISTIC  
REPLAYTV  
RICAVISION 31972  
RUNCO  
ASHA  
30240  
MAGNAVOX 30035, 30039,  
30081, 30149,  
AUDIOVOX  
30037, 30278  
WAYCON  
WESTINGHOUSE  
20451, 20889  
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE  
20463, 20623  
YAMAHA  
20156  
BEAUMARK 30240  
BELL & HOWELL  
30104  
BROKSONIC 30002, 30121,  
30184, 30209,  
30563, 30593  
30240  
30035, 30081  
30037  
30614, 30616  
MAGNIN  
MARANTZ  
MARTA  
MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162,  
31162  
MEDIA CENTER PC  
31972  
MEI  
30039  
30045, 30240,  
30739  
SAMSUNG  
20030, 20650,  
20769, 20833,  
20839, 21405,  
21406, 21407  
20017, 20092,  
20178, 20463,  
21145, 21904,  
21929  
30479  
SANKY  
SANSUI  
30039, 30048  
30041, 30067,  
30209, 30479  
30047, 30104,  
30240  
30043, 30045,  
30121, 30184  
30035, 30037,  
30042, 30047,  
30104  
CALIX  
CANON  
CARVER  
CCE  
CITIZEN  
COLT  
30037  
30035  
30081  
30072, 30278  
30037, 30278  
30072  
30035  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
SEARS  
ZENITH  
MEMOREX  
30035, 30037,  
30039, 30047,  
30048, 30104,  
30162, 30209,  
30240, 30479,  
31037, 31162,  
31262  
CRAIG  
30037, 30047,  
30072, 30240  
CURTIS MATHES  
30035, 30041,  
30060, 30162  
CYBERNEX 30240  
PVR  
ABS  
ALIENWARE 31972  
CYBERPOWER31972  
SHARP  
30048, 30848  
30072  
30240  
31972  
MGA  
30043, 30240  
SHINTOM  
SHOGUN  
SINGER  
MGN TECHNOLOGY  
30240  
CYBERPOWER  
30072  
DELL  
DIRECTV  
GATEWAY  
HEWLETT PACKARD  
31972  
31972  
30739  
31972  
31972  
30045, 30278  
31972  
30042  
30739  
MICROSOFT 31972  
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616  
DAEWOO  
DELL  
DENON  
DIRECTV  
MIND  
MINOLTA  
31972  
30042  
SONY  
30032, 30033,  
30035, 30636,  
31032, 31972  
31972  
MITSUBISHI 30043, 30067  
MOTOROLA 30035, 30048  
STACK 9  
APPENDIX-iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STS  
SYLVANIA  
30042  
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS  
MALATA  
40782, 41159  
40539  
41273, 41533  
40695, 41270  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
TECHNOSONIC  
40730  
40790, 40809  
40490, 40703  
30035, 30043,  
30081, 30593,  
31593  
40490  
CINEVISION 40833, 40869,  
40876  
MARANTZ  
MCINTOSH  
MEMOREX  
SYMPHONIC 30593, 31593  
SYSTEMAX 31972  
TAGAR SYSTEMS  
31972  
CITIZEN  
COBY  
41277  
MICROSOFT 40522  
TECHWOOD 40692  
THETA DIGITAL  
40571  
40778, 40852,  
41107, 41177,  
41351  
MINTEK  
40717, 40839  
MITSUBISHI 40521, 41521  
MOMITSU  
MYRYAD  
NAD  
41082  
40894  
40591, 40692,  
40741  
TOSHIBA  
40503, 40695,  
TATUNG  
TEAC  
30041  
30041  
CURTIS MATHES  
41087  
CYBERHOME  
41154  
TREDEX  
40799, 40800,  
40803, 40804  
TECHNICS  
TEKNIKA  
TIVO  
30035, 30162  
30035, 30037  
30618, 30636,  
30739, 31503  
30240  
40816, 40874,  
41023, 41024,  
41117  
40705, 40833,  
40869, 41169,  
41172, 41234,  
41242  
40872  
40490  
41407  
40675, 41270  
41068, 41085  
NAKAMICHI 41222  
URBAN CONCEPTS  
40503  
NEC  
NESA  
40785  
40717  
US LOGIC  
40839  
TMK  
DAEWOO  
NEXT BASE 40826  
VENTURER 40790  
TOSHIBA  
30043, 30045,  
30209, 31008,  
31972, 31988  
NORCENT  
ONKYO  
40872, 41003,  
VIZIO  
41064, 41226  
41107, 41265  
40503, 40627,  
40792, 41627  
40651  
XBOX  
40522  
YAMAHA  
40490, 40539,  
40545, 41543  
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240  
DAYTEK  
DENON  
DESAY  
DISNEY  
DUAL  
DURABRAND  
TOUCH  
UNITECH  
VECTOR  
31972  
30240  
30045  
ORITRON  
YAMAKAWA 40872  
PANASONIC 40490, 40503,  
40632, 40703,  
ZENITH  
40503, 40591,  
40741, 40869  
41265  
VECTOR RESEARCH  
30038  
VIDEO CONCEPTS  
30045  
VIDEOMAGIC 30037  
VIDEOSONIC 30240  
VIEWSONIC 31972  
41762  
ZOECE  
PHILIPS  
40503, 40539,  
40675, 40854,  
41260, 41267,  
41354  
41127  
40521  
40591, 40675,  
40821, 41268  
LD PLAYER  
DVD2000  
EMERSON  
AIWA  
40203  
PIANODISC 41024  
CARVER  
40064, 40194,  
40323  
ENTERPRISE 40591  
PIONEER  
40525, 40571,  
VOODOO  
WARDS  
31972  
FUNAI  
GATEWAY  
GE  
40675, 41268  
40632, 41571  
41020, 41061  
POLK AUDIO 40539  
PRIMA 41016  
PRINCETON 40674  
DENON  
DISCO VISION  
40059, 40172  
30035, 30042,  
30047, 30048,  
30060, 30072,  
30081, 30149,  
30240  
41073, 41077  
40522, 40717,  
40815  
40715, 40741,  
40744, 40783,  
40833, 40869,  
41044, 41075,  
41099  
POLAROID  
40023  
40203  
FUNAI  
HARMAN/KARDON  
40194  
HITACHI  
MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217  
MARANTZ 40064, 40194  
MITSUBISHI 40059  
NAD  
OPTIMUS  
PANASONIC 40204  
PHILIPS  
GO VIDEO  
PROCEED  
PROSCAN  
PROVISION  
QWESTAR  
RCA  
40672  
40522  
40778  
40651  
40522, 40571,  
40717, 40790,  
40822, 41022,  
41132, 41193  
40869  
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE  
30072, 30209  
XR-1000  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
40023  
30035, 30072  
30038  
30033, 30039,  
30209, 30479,  
31139  
GO VISION  
GOLDSTAR 40741  
GPX  
GRADIENTE 40490  
GREENHILL 40717  
41071, 41072  
40059  
40059  
40699, 40769  
ZT GROUP  
31972  
RIO  
40064, 40194  
GRUNDIG  
HARMAN/KARDON  
40582, 40702  
40539  
RJTECH  
ROTEL  
ROWA  
41360  
40623, 41178  
40823  
PIONEER  
POLK AUDIO  
40023, 40059  
DVD PLAYER  
40194  
ADCOM  
ADVENT  
AIWA  
AKAI  
ALCO  
ALLEGRO  
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS  
40872  
41094  
41016  
40641  
40899, 41089  
40790  
HITACHI  
40573, 40664,  
41247  
40672  
40717  
40571, 40627  
41078  
40702  
41016  
41423  
SAMPO  
SAMSUNG  
40698, 40752  
40490, 40573,  
40744, 40820,  
40899, 41044,  
41075  
QUASAR  
REALISTIC  
SAMSUNG  
SEGA  
SONY  
TECHNICS  
THETA DIGITAL  
40194  
YAMAHA 40217  
40204  
40203  
40323  
40023  
40193, 40201  
40204  
HITEKER  
INITIAL  
INTEGRA  
JATON  
JBL  
40869  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SHARP  
40695  
40695, 40873  
40630, 40675,  
40752, 41256  
JENSEN  
JSI  
AMW  
40872  
APEX DIGITAL  
JVC  
40558, 40623,  
40867  
41049, 41051  
40790  
40490, 40534,  
40682, 40737  
40717, 40790,  
41020, 41149,  
41261  
40711  
40651, 41423  
40826  
40798, 41173  
41533  
41127  
SHARPER IMAGE  
41117  
SHERWOOD 40633, 41043,  
41077  
SHINSONIC 40533, 40839  
SIGMA DESIGNS  
40674  
DVD RECORDER  
APEX DIGITAL  
51056  
ASPIRE DIGITAL  
51168  
40672, 40717,  
40755, 40794,  
40796, 40797,  
40830, 41004,  
41020, 41061,  
41100  
JWIN  
KAWASAKI  
KENWOOD  
KLH  
COBY  
51086  
ASPIRE DIGITAL  
41407  
SONIC BLUE 40869, 41099  
CYBERHOME  
SONY  
40533, 40864,  
41017, 41033,  
41533  
51129  
AUDIOVOX  
40790, 41041,  
41071, 41072,  
41121, 41122  
41071, 41072  
40655, 40662  
KONKA  
KOSS  
FUNAI  
GATEWAY  
GO VIDEO  
50675, 51334  
51073, 51158  
50741, 51158,  
51304, 51730  
51348  
LANDEL  
LASONIC  
LECSON  
LENOXX  
LG  
SOVA  
41122  
AXION  
B & K  
SUNGALE  
41074  
SUPERSCAN 40821  
ILO  
BEL CANTO DESIGN  
41571  
BLAUPUNKT 40717  
BLUE PARADE40571  
BROKSONIC 40695, 40868  
SVA  
40860, 41105  
JVC  
LG  
51164, 51275  
50741  
40591, 40741,  
40801, 40869  
40511  
SYLVANIA  
40675, 40821,  
41268  
LITEON  
51158, 51416,  
51440  
LOEWE  
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,  
40675, 40821  
SYMPHONIC 40675, 41268  
TAG MCLAREN  
40894  
MAGNAVOX 50646  
APPENDIX-iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,  
51011  
PHILIPS  
60157, 60274,  
60626  
GARRARD  
GATEWAY  
80424  
81567  
TAPE DECK  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
50646  
50631, 51475,  
51476  
51086  
50522  
PIONEER  
60032, 60468,  
61062  
AIWA  
CARVER  
DENON  
HARMAN/KARDON  
70029, 70182  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
MAGNAVOX 70029  
MARANTZ  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
70029, 70197  
70029  
70076  
HARMAN/KARDON  
80110, 80189,  
POLK AUDIO 60157  
80891, 81304  
80135, 81320  
80110  
POLAROID  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SENSORY SCIENCE|  
51158  
SHARP  
PROCEED  
PROTON  
QED  
QUAD  
QUASAR  
RCA  
60420  
60157  
60157  
60157  
INTEGRA  
JBL  
50490  
70244, 70273  
70070  
JVC  
80074, 81058,  
81811  
60029  
KENWOOD  
80027, 80077,  
81313, 81569,  
81570  
50675, 51550,  
60032, 60053,  
60179, 60420,  
60468, 61062  
60179, 60180,  
60420  
60157, 60420  
60157  
60157  
70029  
70135, 70282  
70027, 70220  
51556, 50630  
51033, 51069,  
51070, 51431  
50675  
51510  
51275  
SONY  
KLH  
81428  
REALISTIC  
PANASONIC 70229  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
KOSS  
80424  
SYLVANIA  
TOSHIBA  
VICTOR  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
70029  
70027, 70099,  
70220  
LEXICON  
LINN  
81076  
80189  
ROTEL  
SAE  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SHARP  
SHERWOOD 60180  
SONIC FRONTIERS  
60157  
SONY  
SUGDEN  
TAG MCLAREN  
60157  
TASCAM  
TEAC  
MAGNAVOX 80189, 80531,  
81189, 81269  
51544  
50741  
POLK AUDIO  
60087, 60179  
60180  
70029  
70027, 70220  
70029  
70170, 70243,  
70291  
70229  
70273  
70027  
70094, 70097,  
70524  
MARANTZ  
80039, 80189,  
80200, 81189,  
81269  
RCA  
SANSUI  
SONY  
CD PLAYER  
AIWA  
ARCAM  
MCS  
80039, 80346  
60157  
60157  
MICROMEGA 81189  
MITSUBISHI 81393  
60000, 60490  
60157  
TECHNICS  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
BURMESTER 60420  
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS  
60029, 60303  
CARVER  
DENON  
DKK  
DMX ELECTRONICS  
60157  
FISHER  
GARRARD  
GENEXXA  
HARMAN/KARDON  
60157  
HITACHI  
INTEGRA  
JVC  
MYRYAD  
NAD  
81189, 81918  
80320  
YAMAHA  
NAKAMICHI 80347, 81313,  
81555, 81919  
60157, 60179  
60003, 60034  
60000  
60420  
60180, 60378,  
60393, 60420  
60029, 60303  
60072  
60053, 60157  
60036, 60490,  
61907  
NIRO  
81908  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
80135, 81320  
80177, 80219,  
80531, 80670,  
81023, 81074  
81487  
TUNER  
ADC  
ADCOM  
TECHNICS  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
80531  
80616, 81616,  
81617  
80121, 80158,  
80189, 81405  
81077  
60179  
60393, 60420  
60032  
YAMAHA  
OUTLAW  
AIWA  
OUTLAW AUDIO81487  
PANASONIC 80039, 80309,  
81308, 81518  
AMC  
CD RECORDER  
HARMAN/KARDON  
60032  
60101  
60072  
60028, 60190,  
60626  
61318, 61372,  
61711  
60157  
AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES  
81584  
ANAM  
ARCAM  
ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY  
81487  
AUDIOTRONIC  
81189  
AUDIOVOX  
B & K  
PHILIPS  
80189, 81189,  
81269  
71202  
71294  
70626  
71373  
71208  
70626  
70626  
71062, 71087  
70053, 70420  
70000, 70100,  
71364  
71208  
70420  
81074, 81609  
81189  
PIONEER  
80014, 80150,  
80531, 80630,  
81023  
KENWOOD  
JVC  
KENWOOD  
KLH  
KLH  
POLK AUDIO 80189, 81414  
LG  
QUASAR  
RCA  
80039  
KRELL  
LINN  
MAGNAVOX 60038, 60157  
MARANTZ  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
RCA  
80054, 80346,  
80360, 80531,  
81023, 81074,  
81154, 81609  
80163  
81304  
80189, 80346,  
81189  
60157  
81627  
80701, 80820,  
80840  
MARANTZ  
60029, 60038,  
60157, 60180,  
60435, 60626  
60256, 60290,  
60660  
SONY  
BEL CANTO DESIGN  
81584  
BK  
REALISTIC  
SAMSUNG  
SANSUI  
MCINTOSH  
TDK  
TEAC  
80702  
81933  
BOSE  
MCS  
MIRO  
60029  
60000  
YAMAHA  
70888, 71292  
BOSTON ACOUSTICS  
81918  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
80219  
80163, 80322  
MISSION  
MTC  
60157  
60420  
BRIX  
CAPETRONIC 80531  
81602  
SHERWOOD 81077, 81423,  
81567, 81918  
MD RECORDER  
NSM  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
60157  
DENON  
KENWOOD  
ONKYO  
OPTIMUS  
PIONEER  
SHARP  
SHERWOOD 71067  
SONY  
YAMAHA  
70873  
70681, 70826  
70868  
71063  
71063  
CARVER  
80008, 80121,  
80189, 80360,  
81189  
81916  
81414  
80121, 81360  
80424  
80219, 80360  
81487  
SIRIUS  
81602, 81627,  
81811  
80158, 81058,  
81406, 81759  
60101, 61327  
60000, 60032,  
60087, 60179,  
60420, 60468  
SONY  
CLASSE  
DELPHI  
DENON  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
SOUNDESIGN  
PANASONIC 60029, 60303,  
60388, 60752  
PARASOUND 60420  
70861  
80670  
STEREOPHONICS  
81023  
SUNFIRE  
TEAC  
70490  
70490, 70888,  
71909  
FOSGATE  
81313  
80163, 81074  
APPENDIX-v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TECHNICS  
80039, 80309,  
81308, 81518  
81189  
80135  
80074  
80014, 80054,  
80158, 80189  
81406, 81414  
80176, 81176,  
81276, 81331,  
81375, 81908,  
81916  
THORENS  
TOSHIBA  
VICTOR  
WARDS  
XM  
YAMAHA  
(TUNER ID1)  
(TUNER ID2)  
(XM ID1)  
81917  
81918  
(XM ID 2)  
81919  
APPENDIX-vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© 2006  
All rights reserved.  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.  
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND  
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN  
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA  
Printed in Malaysia  
WG73630  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U B  
NS-P430/  
NS-P436  
(NS-P430/NS-P436: NX-430P + NX-C430 +YST-SW015)  
HOME CINEMA 5.1CH SPEAKER PACKAGE/  
HOME CINEMA 6.1CH SPEAKER PACKAGE  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Read these instructions.  
Keep these instructions.  
Heed all warnings.  
CAUTION  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
Follow all instructions.  
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE  
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE  
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO  
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Do not use this apparatus near water.  
Clean only with dry cloth.  
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols  
8
9
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,  
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead  
symbol, within an equilateral triangle,  
is intended to alert you to the  
presence of uninsulated “dangerous  
voltage” within the product’s  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of  
electric shock to persons.  
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades  
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug  
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide  
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If  
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult  
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
The exclamation point within an  
equilateral triangle is intended to alert  
you to the presence of important  
operating and maintenance  
(servicing) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the  
appliance.  
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or  
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,  
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.  
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
WARNING  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN  
OR MOISTURE.  
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the  
apparatus. When a cart is used, use  
caution when moving the cart/  
apparatus combination to avoid injury  
from tip-over.  
IMPORTANT  
Please record the serial number of this system in  
the space below.  
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when  
Model:  
unused for long periods of time.  
Serial No.:  
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or  
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects  
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been  
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,  
or has been dropped.  
The serial number is located on the rear of the  
main unit.  
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for  
future reference.  
● Be sure to allow spaces of at least 20 cm above,  
behind and on both sides of the unit.  
● Do not place the following objects on this unit:  
A vessel with water in it.  
If the vessel falls by vibrations and water spills, it  
may cause damage to the unit, and/or you may get  
an electric shock.  
II  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)  
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS  
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that  
interference will not occur in all installations. If this  
product is found to be the source of interference, which  
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,  
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the  
following measures:  
UNIT!  
This product, when installed as indicated in the  
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC  
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved  
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the  
FCC, to use the product.  
Relocate either this product or the device that is being  
affected by the interference.  
2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to  
accessories and/or another product use only high  
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this  
product MUST be used. Follow all installation  
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void  
your FCC authorization to use this product in the  
USA.  
3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to  
comply with the requirements listed in FCC  
Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.  
Compliance with these requirements provides a  
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this  
product in a residential environment will not result in  
harmful interference with other electronic devices.  
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit  
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.  
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient  
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon  
lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.  
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory  
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to  
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the  
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics  
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA  
90620.  
The above statements apply ONLY to those products  
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its  
subsidiaries.  
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies  
and, if not installed and used according to the  
instructions found in the users manual, may cause  
interference harmful to the operation of other  
electronic devices.  
We WantYou Listening For A Lifetime  
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out  
of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets  
the sound come through loud and clear without annoying  
blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without  
affecting your sensitive hearing.  
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is  
often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA  
and the Electronic Industries Association’s  
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you  
to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive  
volume levels.  
III  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UNPACKING  
Please check to make sure all listed items are included.  
Speaker cables  
Main and rear speakers  
(and rear center speaker for NS-P436)  
[15m]  
<NS-P430>  
NX-430P  
X 2  
<NS-P436>  
<NS-P430>  
X 3  
X 4  
<NS-P436>  
[4m]  
X 5  
X 3  
Center speaker  
NX-C430  
Subwoofer cable  
Subwoofer  
YST-SW015  
SUBWOOFER SYSTEM YST-SW015  
Fasteners (for NX-C430)  
STANDBY/ON  
B.A.S.S.  
HIGH CUT50  
–
150Hz VOLUME  
0
–
10  
X 2  
Nonskid pads (for YST-SW015)  
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR U.K. MODEL  
IMPORTANT:  
For Canadian Customers  
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to  
wide slot and fully insert.  
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN  
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian  
ICES-003.  
Blue: NEUTRAL  
Brown: LIVE  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings  
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to  
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured  
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be  
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L  
or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is  
connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.  
For U.K. customers  
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug  
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an  
appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the  
instructions described below.  
Note: The plug severed from the mains lead must be  
destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if  
engaged in a live socket outlet.  
IV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA NS-P430/NS-P436 Speaker Package.  
CAUTION: Read this before operating your unit.  
●
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual  
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.  
● Do not cover the rear panel of this unit with a newspaper, a  
tablecloth, a curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If  
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage  
to this unit and/or personal injury.  
●
Install the speakers in a cool, dry, clean place – away from  
windows, heat sources, sources of excessive vibration, dust,  
moisture and cold. Avoid sources of humming (transformers,  
motors). To prevent fire or electric shock, do not expose the  
speakers to rain or water.  
● Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are  
completed.  
● The voltage to be used must be the same as that specified on  
the rear panel. Using this unit with a higher voltage than  
specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit,  
and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for  
any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other  
than specified.  
●
●
To prevent the enclosure from warping or discoloring, do not  
place the speakers where they will be exposed to direct sunlight  
or excessive humidity.  
Avoid installing the speakers where foreign objects may fall onto  
them and/or where they may be exposed to liquid dripping or  
splashing.  
● To prevent lightning damage, disconnect the AC power plug  
Do not place the following objects on top of the speakers:  
when there is an electric storm.  
●
Other components, as they might cause damage and/or  
● Super-bass frequencies reproduced by this unit may cause a  
turntable to generate a howling sound. In such a case, move this  
unit away from the turntable.  
discoloration on the surface of the speakers.  
●
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they might cause fire,  
damage to the speakers and/or personal injury.  
● This unit may be damaged if certain sounds are continuously  
outputted at high volume level. For example, if 20 Hz–50 Hz sine  
waves from a test disc, bass sounds from electronic instruments,  
etc. are continuously outputted, or when the stylus of a turntable  
touches the surface of a disc, reduce the volume level to prevent  
this unit from being damaged.  
●
Containers with liquid in them, as they might cause electric  
shock to the user and/or damage to the speakers.  
●
Do not place the speakers where they are liable to be knocked  
over or struck by falling objects. Stable placement will also  
ensure better sound performance.  
●
●
Placing the speakers on the same shelf or rack as the turntable  
can result in feedback.  
● If you hear distorted noise (i.e. unnatural, intermittent “rapping” or  
“hammering” sounds) coming from this unit, reduce the volume  
level. Extremely loud playing of a movie soundtrack’s low  
frequency, bass-heavy sounds or similarly loud popular music  
passages can damage this speaker system.  
Secure placement or installation is the owner’s responsibility.  
YAMAHA shall not be liable for any accident caused by improper  
placement or installation of speakers.  
●
●
Any time you note distortion, reduce the volume control on your  
amplifier to a lower setting. Never allow your amplifier to be  
driven into “clipping”. Otherwise the speakers may be damaged.  
● Vibration generated by super-bass frequencies may distort  
images on a TV. In such a case, move this unit away from the TV  
set.  
When using an amplifier with a rated output power higher than  
the nominal input power of the speakers, care should be taken  
never to exceed the speakers’ maximum input.  
● When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp  
the plug; do not pull the cord.  
● When not planning to use this unit for a long period (i.e. vacation,  
●
●
Do not attempt to clean the speakers with chemical solvents as  
this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.  
etc.), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.  
● VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
Do not attempt to modify or fix the speakers. Contact qualified  
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The  
cabinet should never be opened for any reason.  
(For China, Korean and General models)  
The voltage selector switch on the rear  
panel of this unit must be set for your  
local main voltage BEFORE plugging  
this unit into the AC main supply.  
●
Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section regarding  
common operating errors before concluding that the speakers  
are faulty.  
–
–
110V 120V  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
220V 240V  
Voltages are 110-120/220-240 V AC, 50/  
60 Hz.  
ForYST-SW015  
●
Do not operate this unit upside down. It may overheat, possibly  
causing damage.  
Standby mode  
●
Do not use excessive force on switches, controls or connection  
wires. When moving this unit, first disconnect the power plug  
and the wires connected to other equipments. Never pull the  
wires themselves.  
If the POWER switch is set to the ON position and the AUTO  
STANDBY switch is set to the HIGH or LOW position, this unit  
turns into the standby mode when no signal is received by this  
unit for 7 to 8 minutes.  
In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small  
quantity of power.  
●
●
Since this unit has a built-in power amplifier, heat will radiate  
from the rear panel. Place the unit apart from the walls, allowing  
spaces of at least 20 cm above, behind and on both sides of the  
unit to prevent fire or damage. Furthermore, do not position with  
the rear panel facing down on the floor or other surfaces.  
WARNING  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO  
NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
When using a humidifier, be sure to avoid condensation inside  
this unit by allowing enough spaces around this unit or avoiding  
excess humidification. Condensation might cause a fire, damage  
to this unit, and/or electric shock.  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMPONENTS OF THE PACKAGE  
The speaker package “NS-P430 and NS-P436” is designed  
for use in a multi-channel audio system such as a home  
theater system.  
<YST-SW015>  
Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System with a  
built-in power amplifier  
● This subwoofer system employs Advanced Yamaha  
Active Servo Technology which YAMAHA has developed  
for reproducing higher quality super-bass sound. (Refer to  
page 14 for details on Advanced Yamaha Active Servo  
Technology.) This super-bass sound adds a more  
realistic, theater-in-the-home effect to your stereo system.  
● The HIGH CUT control enables you to adjust the tone  
balance between the subwoofer and the main speakers.  
● The Automatic power-switching function saves you the  
trouble of pressing the STANDBY/ON button to turn the  
power on or turn it to the STANDBY mode.  
NS-P430 includes four NX-430P speaker systems, one NX-  
C430 speaker system and one YST-SW015 subwoofer  
system.  
NS-P436 includes five NX-430P speaker systems, one NX-  
C430 speaker system and one YST-SW015 subwoofer  
system.  
<NX-430P>  
2-way acoustic-suspension speaker system used for  
the main and rear speakers (and rear center speaker for  
NS-P436)  
<NX-C430>  
2-way acoustic-suspension speaker system used for  
the center speaker  
QD-Bass Technology  
QD-Bass (Quatre Dispersion Bass) technology uses  
square, pyramid-shaped reflective plates to radiate the  
sound in four horizontal directions.  
CONTENTS  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ........ II  
UNPACKING ..................................................IV  
CAUTION .........................................................1  
COMPONENTS OF THE PACKAGE .............. 2  
CONNECTIONS.............................................. 7  
An example of basic connections .................... 7  
How to connect speaker cables to the input  
and output terminals of the speakers............... 9  
USING THE SUBWOOFER (YST-SW015) ... 10  
Controls and their functions.......................... 10  
Automatic power-switching functon ................. 11  
Adjusting the subwoofer before use ................ 12  
Frequency characteristics................................ 13  
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS ...................... 3  
Placing the subwoofer ................................... 4  
Placing the center speaker ............................. 4  
Mounting the main/rear/center speakers  
ADVANCEDYAMAHA ACTIVE SERVO  
TECHNOLOGY (forYST-SW015) ................ 14  
(and rear center speaker for NS-P436)  
on a wall ............................................................ 5  
Mounting the main/rear speakers  
(and rear center speaker for NS-P436)  
by using commercially available speaker  
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. 15  
SPECIFICATIONS .......................... Back Cover  
stands or brackets ............................................. 6  
I About this manual  
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design  
and specifications are subject to change in part for the  
reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and  
others. In this case, the product has priority.  
• Some of the illustrations and names of the package  
contents etc. written in this manual may differ from  
the actual products and the names written on the  
package etc.  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETTING UP THE SPEAKERS  
Before making connections, place all speakers in their respective positions. The positioning of the speakers is important  
because it controls the whole sound quality of this system.  
Place the speakers depending on your listening position by following the instructions below.  
Speaker configuration  
Placing speakers  
Main speakers:  
On both sides of and at approximately  
<NS-P430>  
the same height as the TV set.  
This speaker package employs a 6 speaker configuration: 2  
main speakers, 2 rear speakers, a center speaker and a  
subwoofer.  
Rear speakers:  
Behind your listening position, facing  
slightly inward. About 1.8 m (approx. 6  
feet) from the floor.  
The main speakers emit main source sound. The rear  
speakers emit surround sounds, and the center speaker  
emits center sounds (dialog etc.). The subwoofer emits  
reinforcing low frequencies on your audio system.  
Center speaker: Precisely between the main speakers.  
Rear center speaker (for NS-P436):  
Precisely between the rear speakers.  
<NS-P436>  
Subwoofer:  
The position of the subwoofer is not so  
critical because low bass tones are not  
highly directional.  
Refer to “Placing the subwoofer” on  
page 4 for a recommended positioning  
of the subwoofer.  
This speaker package employs a 7 speaker configuration: 2  
main speakers, 2 rear speakers, a center speaker, a rear  
center speaker and a subwoofer.  
The main speakers emit main source sound. The rear and  
rear center speakers emit surround sounds, and the center  
speaker emits center sounds (dialog etc.). The subwoofer  
emits reinforcing low frequencies on your audio system.  
Note  
In this speaker package, the same speakers (NX-430P)  
are used for the main and rear speakers (and rear  
center speaker for NS-P436).  
Main R  
Center  
Main L  
Subwoofer  
TV-set  
Main L  
Center  
Main R  
Rear R  
Subwoofer  
Rear center  
(for NS-P436)  
Rear L  
These speakers feature a magnetically shielded design,  
but there is still a chance that placing them too close to a  
TV set might impair picture color. Should this happen,  
move the speakers away from the TV set.  
Rear L  
Rear center  
(for NS-P436)  
Rear R  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅵ Placing the subwoofer  
It is recommended to place the subwoofer on the outside of  
either the right or the left main speaker. (See fig. Å .) The  
placement shown in fig. ı is also possible, however, if the  
subwoofer system is placed directly facing the wall, the  
bass effect may die because the sound from it and the  
sound reflected by the wall may cancel out each other. To  
prevent this from happening, face the subwoofer system at  
an angle as shown in fig. Å.  
Å
ı
Note  
There may be a case that you cannot obtain enough super-  
bass sounds from the subwoofer when listening in the  
center of the room. This is because “standing waves” have  
been developed between two parallel walls and they cancel  
the bass sounds.  
(
: Subwoofer,  
: Main speaker)  
In such a case, face the subwoofer obliquely to the wall. It  
also may be necessary to break up the parallel surfaces by  
placing bookshelves etc. along the walls.  
Use the nonskid pads  
Put the provided nonskid pads at the four corners on the  
bottom of the subwoofer to prevent the subwoofer from  
moving by vibrations etc.  
Ⅵ Placing the center speaker  
Notes  
You can place the speaker on top of the TV if the top is flat,  
on the floor under the TV, or inside the TV rack . Be sure to  
place the speaker in a stable position.  
When placing the speaker on top of the TV, to prevent the  
speaker from falling, attach the provided fasteners at two  
points on the bottom of the speaker and on the top of the  
TV.  
● Do not place the speaker on top of a TV whose area is  
smaller than the bottom of the speaker. If placed, the  
speaker may fall and cause injury.  
● Do not place the speaker on top of a TV if the top is  
inclined.  
● Do not touch the adhesive surface after peeling off  
the seal as this will weaken its adhesive strength.  
● Thoroughly wipe clean the surface where the fastener  
is to be applied. Note that adhesive strength is  
weakened if the surface is dirty, oily or wet and that  
this may cause the center speaker to fall.  
Fastener  
Peel off  
the seal  
E-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅵ Mounting the main/rear/center speakers (and rear center  
speaker for NS-P436) on the wall  
You can mount the main, rear and/or center speakers (and/  
or rear center speaker for NS-P436) on a wall.  
1
Tapping screw  
To mount the speakers on a wall, use the holes of the  
(Available at the  
brackets attached on the speakers’ back panels.  
hardware store)  
Main/rear/rear center (for NS-P436)  
Diam. 3.5 to 4 mm  
Min.  
20 mm  
4 mm  
Holes  
Wall/ wall support  
2
Center  
Main/rear/rear center (for NS-P436)  
26 mm  
1 Fasten two screws into a firm wall or wall support at the  
interval shown below.  
Main/rear/rear center (for NS-P436) .......... 26 mm (1”)  
Center ............................................. 222.8 mm (8-3/4”)  
2 Hang the speaker by mounting the holes on the  
protruding screws.  
* Make sure that the screws are securely affixed by the  
narrow parts of the holes.  
Center  
WARNING  
● Each speaker weighs as follows.  
222.8 mm  
Main/rear/rear center (for NS-P436)  
...................................................... 1.2 kg (2 lbs. 10 oz.)  
Center .......................................... 1.7 kg (3 lbs. 12 oz.)  
Do not mount them on thin plywood or a wall  
composed of a soft surface material. If mounted, the  
screws may pull out of the flimsy surface and the  
speakers may fall.This may damage the speakers or  
cause personal injury.  
● Do not affix the speakers to a wall using nails,  
adhesives, or any other unstable hardware. Long-  
term use and vibrations may cause the speakers to  
fall.  
● To avoid accidents resulting from tripping over loose  
speaker cables, fix the cables to the wall.  
● Select an appropriate position on the wall to mount  
the speaker so that no one will injure his/her head or  
face.  
E-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅵ Mounting the main/rear speakers (and rear center speaker for  
NS-P436) by using commercially available speaker stands or  
brackets  
You can also use the screw holes on the bottom of the  
Using theYamaha Speaker Stand SPS-10MM (option)  
speaker for installing the speakers on commericially  
By using the Yamaha Speaker Stand  
available speaker stands (if you do not use the  
SPS-10MM, speakers can be placed  
attached mounting brackets.)  
on the floor. (Two stands make a set.)  
A screw with a diameter of 4 mm  
can be used.  
(Hole depth : 10 mm)  
SPS-10MM  
60 mm  
* The SPS-10MM is not available in some areas.  
Removing the front cover  
The front cover is fastened to the enclosure at four points  
and can be removed if desired. To remove the cover, hold  
on to both sides and slowly pull straight away from the  
speaker. To reattach, line up the four holes on the inner  
surface of the cover with the four corresponding pegs on the  
speaker and push gently.  
Main/rear/rear center (for NS-P436)  
Note  
When the cover is removed, be sure not to touch the  
speaker units with your hands or to exert excessive  
force with tools.  
Center  
E-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONNECTIONS  
Caution: Plug in the subwoofer and other audio/video components after all connections are  
completed.  
Ⅵ An example of basic connections  
Main speakers  
Center speaker  
Right  
Left  
Amplifier  
SPEAKERS  
REAR CENTER  
MAIN  
CENTER  
R
L
+
+
+
A
—
—
—
—
—
B
+
+
REAR  
R
L
R
L
(SURROUND)  
SUB  
WOOFER  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
AUTO  
STANDBY  
PHASE  
/MONO  
Subwoofer  
OFF LOW HIGH NORM REV  
INPUT  
/MONO  
AUTO  
STANDBY  
PHASE  
OFF LOW HIGH NORM REV  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Rear speaker  
Left  
Rear speaker  
Right  
To AC outlet  
Rear center speaker  
(for NS-P436)  
E-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Connect the main, center and rear speakers (and rear  
center speaker for NS-P436) to the speaker output  
terminals of your amplifier with the provided speaker  
cables.  
● Connect the subwoofer to the line output (pin jack)  
terminal(s) of the amplifier.  
* To connect with a YAMAHA DSP amplifier (or AV  
receiver), connect the SUBWOOFER (or LOW PASS  
etc.) terminal on the rear of the DSP amplifier (or AV  
receiver) to the L/MONO INPUT terminal of the  
subwoofer.  
* The provided speaker cables have labels marked  
FRONT L, FRONT R, CENTER, REAR L, REAR R  
(and REAR C for NS-P436). Connect each speaker  
cable to the corresponding speaker by following the  
figure on page 7.  
* To connect the subwoofer to the SPLIT SUBWOOFER  
terminals on the rear of the DSP amplifier, connect  
them to both the left L/MONO and right R INPUT  
terminals of the subwoofer.  
(The speaker cables marked FRONT L/R are used for  
connecting the main speakers to the MAIN speakers’  
terminals on the amplifier.)  
* Connect each speaker making sure not to reverse the  
polarity (+, –). If the speaker is connected with  
reversed polarity, the sound will be unnatural and lack  
bass.  
Note  
When connecting to a monaural line output terminal of the  
amplifier, connect to the L/MONO INPUT terminal.  
* For the main and rear speakers only, connect one  
speaker to the left (marked L) terminals of your  
amplifier, and another speaker to the right (marked R)  
terminals.  
E-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅵ How to connect speaker cables to the input terminals of the  
speakers  
For connections, keep the speaker cables as short as possible. Do not bundle or roll up the excess part of the cables. If the  
connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers.  
Main speakers  
Center speaker  
Before connecting  
Remove the insulation coating at the extremity of each  
Use the provided speaker cables (4 m). One side of the  
speaker cable is red and the other side is black.  
Connect the (+) terminals on both the speaker and the  
amplifier using the red side of the cable. Connect the (–)  
terminals on both components using the black side.  
speaker cable by twisting the coating off.  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
How to Connect:  
Red  
1 Press and hold the terminal’s tab, as shown in the  
figure.  
2 Insert the bare wire.  
3 Release your finger from the tab to allow it to lock  
securely on the cable’s wire end.  
4 Test the firmness of the connection by pulling lightly on  
Black  
the cable at the terminal.  
Rear speakers  
Rear center speaker (for NS-P436)  
Note  
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other as  
this could damage the speaker or the amplifier, or both  
of them.  
Use the provided speaker cables (15 m). One side of the  
speaker cable has a gray line and the other side has no line.  
Connect the (+) terminals on both the speaker and the  
amplifier using the side with a gray line. Connect the (–)  
terminals on both components using the side with no line.  
Red: positive (+)  
Black: negative (–)  
Gray line  
E-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USING THE SUBWOOFER (YST-SW015)  
Ⅵ Controls and their functions  
Front panel  
SUBWOOFER SYSTEM YST-SW015  
STANDBY/ON  
B.A.S.S.  
HIGH CUT50  
–
150Hz VOLUME  
0
–
10  
SUBWOOFER SYSTEM YST-SW015  
–
–
0 10  
STANDBY/ON  
B.A.S.S.  
HIGH CUT50 150Hz VOLUME  
Port  
1 2  
3
4
5
Rear panel (General model)  
6
INPUT  
AUTO  
PHASE  
/MONO  
STANDBY  
OFF LOW HIGH NORM REV  
INPUT  
/MONO  
AUTO  
STANDBY  
PHASE  
–
–
110V 120V  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
220V 240V  
OFF LOW HIGH NORM REV  
110V–120V  
VOLTAGE  
SELECTOR  
220V–240V  
POWER  
ON  
POWER  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
8
9
0
7
1 Power indicator  
Lights up in green while the subwoofer is on.  
4 HIGH CUT control  
Adjusts the high frequency cut off point.  
Lights up in red while the subwoofer is set in the  
standby mode by the operation of the automatic power-  
switching function.  
Frequencies higher than the frequency selected by this  
control are all cut off (and no output).  
* One graduation of this control represents 10 Hz.  
Goes off when the subwoofer is set in the standby  
mode.  
100 Hz  
90 Hz  
80 Hz  
110 Hz  
120 Hz  
70 Hz  
60 Hz  
130 Hz  
140 Hz  
2 STANDBY/ON button  
Press this button to turn on the power when the  
POWER (7) switch is set in the ON position. (The  
power indicator lights up in green.)  
50 Hz  
150 Hz  
Press again to set the subwoofer in the standby mode.  
(The power indicator goes off.)  
5 VOLUME control  
Adjusts the volume level. Turn the control clockwise to  
increase the volume, and counterclockwise to  
decrease the volume.  
Standby mode  
The subwoofer is still using a small amount of power  
in this mode.  
6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch  
(For China, Korean and General models)  
If the preset setting of the switch is incorrect, set the  
switch to the proper voltage range (220V-240V or  
110V-120V) of your area.  
3 B.A.S.S. (Bass Action Selector System) button  
When this button is pressed in to the MUSIC position,  
the bass sound in audio software is well reproduced.  
By pressing the button again so that it pops out at the  
MOVIE position, the bass sound in video software is  
well reproduced.  
Consult your dealer if you are unsure of the correct  
setting.  
WARNING  
Be sure to unplug the subwoofer before setting the  
VOLTAGE SELECTOR switch correctly.  
MOVIE MUSIC  
E-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 POWER switch  
Normally, set this switch to the ON position to use the  
subwoofer. In this state, you can turn on the subwoofer  
or turn the subwoofer into the standby mode by  
pressing the STANDBY/ON (2) button. Set this switch  
to the OFF position to completely cut off the  
subwoofer’s power supply from the AC line.  
8 INPUT terminals  
Used to input line level signals from the amplifier.  
(Refer to “CONNECTIONS” for details.)  
9 AUTO STANDBY (HIGH/LOW/OFF) switch  
This switch is originally set to the OFF position. By  
setting this switch to the HIGH or LOW position, the  
subwoofer’s automatic power-switching function  
operates as described below. If you do not need this  
function, leave this switch in the OFF position.  
* Make sure to change the setting of this switch only  
when the subwoofer is set in the standby mode by  
pressing the STANDBY/ON (2) button.  
0 PHASE switch  
Normally this switch is to be set to the REV (reverse)  
position. However, according to the listening condition  
or your preference, there may be a case when better  
sound quality is obtained by setting this switch to the  
NORM (normal) position. Select the better position by  
monitoring the sound.  
Ⅵ Automatic power-switching function  
If the source being played is stopped and the input signal is  
cut off for 7 to 8 minutes, the subwoofer automatically  
switches to the standby mode. (When the subwoofer  
switches to the standby mode by the automatic power-  
switching function, the power indicator lights up in red.)  
When you play a source again, the power of the subwoofer  
turns on automatically by sensing audio signals input to the  
subwoofer.  
This function operates by sensing a certain level of low  
frequency input signal. Usually set the AUTO STANDBY  
switch to the LOW position. However, if this function does  
not operate smoothly, set the switch to the HIGH position. In  
the HIGH position, the power will turn on even with a low  
level of input signal. But please be aware that the subwoofer  
may not switch to the standby mode when there is an  
extremely low input signal.  
* The power might turn on unexpectedly by sensing noise  
from other appliances. If that occurs, set the AUTO  
STANDBY switch to the OFF position and use the  
STANDBY/ON button to switch the power between on  
and in the standby mode manually.  
* This function detects the low-frequency components  
below 200 Hz of the input signals (i.e., the explosion in  
the action movie, the sound of the bass guitar or the bass  
drum, etc.).  
* The minutes required to switch the subwoofer to the  
standby mode might change by sensing noise from other  
appliances.  
This function is available only when the power of the  
subwoofer is on (by pressing the STANDBY/ON button).  
E-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅵ Adjusting the subwoofer before use  
Before using the subwoofer, adjust the subwoofer to obtain the optimum volume and tone balance between the subwoofer and  
the main speakers by following the procedures described below.  
Front panel  
SUBWOOFER SYSTEM YST-SW015  
STANDBY/ON  
B.A.S.S.  
HIGH CUT50  
–
1
5
0
H
z
V
O
L
U
M
E
0
–
10  
SUBWOOFER SYSTEM YST-SW015  
–
–
10  
STANDBY/ON  
B.A.S.S.  
HIGH CUT50 150Hz VOLUME  
0
3 8 5 1, 6  
Rear panel  
INPUT  
INPUT  
AUTO  
STANDBY  
PHASE  
MONO  
OFF LOW HIGH NORM REV  
POWER  
AUTO  
STANDBY  
PHASE  
/MONO  
ON  
OFF LOW HIGH NORM REV  
002020
OFF  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
3
7
1 Set the VOLUME control to minimum (0).  
7 Set the PHASE switch to the position which  
gives you the better bass sound.  
2 Turn on the power of all the other  
Normally, set the switch to the REV (reverse) position. If  
the desired response cannot be obtained, set the switch  
to the NORM (normal) position.  
components.  
3 Make sure that the POWER switch is set to  
the ON position, then press the STANDBY/  
ON button to turn on the subwoofer.  
8 Select “MOVIE” or “MUSIC” according to the  
played source.  
* The Power indicator lights up in green.  
MOVIE: When a movie type source is played, the low-  
frequency effects are enhanced to allow the listener  
enjoy more powerful sound. (The sound will be thicker  
and deeper.)  
4 Play a source containing low-frequency  
components and adjust the amplifier’s  
volume control to the desired listening level.  
MUSIC: When an ordinary music source is played, the  
excessive low-frequency components are cut off to  
make the sound clearer. (The sound will be lighter and  
reproduces the melody line more clearly.)  
5 Adjust the HIGH CUT control to the position  
where the desired response can be  
obtained.  
This system is designed so that the optimum tone  
balance between the subwoofer and the main speakers  
(NX-430P) is obtained when this control is set at 110  
Hz. However, the tone balance may change depending  
on the room size, the distance from the subwoofer to  
the main speakers, etc. So, if you prefer, turn the HIGH  
CUT control and set it to a position where a better tone  
balance is obtained.  
• Once the volume balance between the subwoofer and  
the main speakers is adjusted, you can adjust the  
volume of your whole sound system by using the  
amplifier’s volume control.  
However, if you change the main speakers NX-430P  
to others, you must make this adjustment again.  
• For adjusting the VOLUME control, the HIGH CUT  
control and the PHASE switch, refer to “Frequency  
characteristics” on the next page.  
6 Increase the volume gradually to adjust the  
volume balance between the subwoofer and  
the main speakers.  
E-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ⅵ Frequency characteristics  
Adjustment of the VOLUME control, the HIGH CUT control and the PHASE switch should be changed depending on the room  
size, the distance from the subwoofer to the main speakers, sources, etc.  
Following figures show the optimum adjustment of each control and the frequency characteristics when this subwoofer is  
combined with NX-430P.  
100  
Frequency characteristics of this subwoofer  
(YST-SW015)  
●
When combined with NX-430P  
–
–
10  
HIGH CUT50 150Hz VOLUME  
0
PHASE–Set to the REV  
(reverse) position.  
B.A.S.S.–MOVIE  
YST-SW015  
NX-430P  
E-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADVANCEDYAMAHA ACTIVE SERVO TECHNOLOGY  
(forYST-SW015)  
The theory of Yamaha Active Servo Technology has been  
based upon two major factors, the Helmholtz resonator and  
negative-impedance drive. Active Servo Processing  
speakers reproduce the bass frequencies through an “air  
woofer”, which is a port or opening in the speaker’s cabinet.  
This opening is used instead of, and performs the functions  
of, a woofer in a conventionally designed speaker system.  
Thus, signals of low amplitude within the cabinet can,  
according to the Helmholtz resonance theory, be outputted  
from this opening as waves of great amplitude if the size of  
the opening and the volume of the cabinet are in the correct  
proportion to satisfy a certain ratio.  
amplifier is able to generate precise, low-amplitude, low-  
frequency waves with superior damping characteristics.  
These waves are then radiated from the cabinet opening as  
high-amplitude signals. The system can, therefore, by  
employing the negative-impedance output drive amplifier  
and a speaker cabinet with the Helmholtz resonator,  
reproduce an extremely wide range of frequencies with  
amazing sound quality and less distortion.  
The features described above, then, are combined to be the  
fundamental structure of the conventional Yamaha Active  
Servo Technology.  
In order to accomplish this, moreover, the amplitudes within  
the cabinet must be both precise and of sufficient power  
because these amplitudes must overcome the “load”  
presented by the air that exists within the cabinet.  
Our new Active Servo Technology — Advanced Yamaha  
Active Servo Technology — adopted Advanced Negative  
Impedance Converter (ANIC) circuits, which allows the  
conventional negative impedance converter to dynamically  
vary in order to select an optimum value for speaker  
impedance variation. With this new ANIC circuits, Advanced  
Yamaha Active Servo Technology can provide more stable  
performance and improved sound pressure compared with  
the conventional Yamaha Active Servo Technology, resulting  
in more natural and dynamic bass reproduction.  
Thus it is this problem that is resolved through the employ-  
ment of a new design in which the amplifier supplies special  
signals. If the electrical resistance of the voice coil could be  
reduced to zero, the movement of the speaker unit would  
become linear with respect to signal voltage. To accomplish  
this, a special negative-impedance output-drive amplifier for  
subtracting output impedance of the amplifier is used.  
By employing negative-impedance drive circuits, the  
Cabinet  
Air woofer  
(Helmholtz resonator)  
High-amplitude  
bass sound  
Port  
Advanced Negative-  
impedance Converter  
Active Servo  
Processing  
Amplifier  
Signals  
Signals of low amplitude  
E-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if  
the instructions given below do not help, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service  
center.  
Problem  
Cause  
What to Do  
No sound.  
Speaker cables are not connected  
securely.  
Connect them securely.  
Sound level is too low.  
Speaker cables are not connected  
correctly.  
Connect them correctly, that is L (left) to  
L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”.  
ForYST-SW015  
What to Do  
Cause  
Problem  
Connect it securely.  
The power plug is not securely  
connected.  
Power is not supplied even  
though the STANDBY/ON button  
is set to the ON position.  
Set the POWER switch to the ON  
position.  
The POWER switch is set to the OFF  
position.  
Turn the VOLUME control to the right.  
Connect them securely.  
The VOLUME control is set to 0.  
No sound.  
Speaker cables are not connected  
securely.  
Connect them correctly, that is L (left) to  
L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”.  
Speaker cables are not connected  
correctly.  
Sound level is too low.  
Set the switch to the other position.  
Setting of the PHASE switch is not  
proper.  
Play a source sound with bass  
frequencies.  
A source sound with few bass  
frequencies is played.  
Set the HIGH CUT control to a higher  
position.  
Reposition the subwoofer or break up  
the parallel surface by placing  
It is influenced by standing waves.  
bookshelves etc. along the walls.  
Set the POWER switch to the ON  
position.  
The POWER switch is set to the OFF  
position.  
The subwoofer does not turn on  
automatically.  
Set the STANDBY/ON button to the ON  
position.  
The STANDBY/ON button is set to the  
OFF position.  
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the  
“HIGH” or “LOW” position.  
The AUTO STANDBY switch is set to  
the OFF position.  
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the  
The level of input signal is too low.  
“HIGH” position.  
Move the subwoofer further away from  
such appliances and/or reposition the  
connected speaker cables.  
There is an influence of noise  
generated from external appliances etc.  
The subwoofer does not turn into  
the standby mode automatically.  
Otherwise, set the AUTO STANDBY  
switch to the “OFF” position.  
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the  
“HIGH” or “LOW” position.  
The AUTO STANDBY switch is set to  
the OFF position.  
Set the AUTO STANDBY switch to the  
“HIGH” position.  
The level of input signal is too low.  
The subwoofer turns into the  
standby mode unexpectedly.  
Move the subwoofer farther away from  
such appliances and/or reposition the  
connected speaker cables.  
There is an influence of noise  
generated from external appliances etc.  
The subwoofer turns on  
unexpectedly.  
Otherwise, set the AUTO STANDBY  
switch to the “OFF” position.  
E-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Ⅵ NX-430P, NX-C430  
Ⅵ YST-SW015  
Type ............... 2-way acoustic-suspension speaker system  
Type ............... Advanced Yamaha Active Servo Technology  
Magnetic shielding type  
Magnetic shielding type  
Driver  
Driver ....................................... 16 cm (6-1/2”) cone woofer  
Amplifier Output.................................................. 70 W/5Ω  
Frequency Response ...............................30 Hz to 200 Hz  
<NX-430P>....................... Coaxial 2-way [5 cm (2”) cone  
and 1.3 cm (1/2”) dome] speaker x 1  
5 cm (2”) full range cone speaker x 1  
<NX-C430> ...................... Coaxial 2-way [5 cm (2”) cone  
and 1.3 cm (1/2”) dome] speaker x 1  
5 cm (2”) full range cone speaker x 2  
Power Supply  
U.S.A. and Canada models .................... AC 120V, 60 Hz  
U.K. and Europe models ........................ AC 230V, 50 Hz  
Australia model....................................... AC 240V, 50 Hz  
China, Korean and General models  
Nominal Input Power ................................................. 30W  
Maximum Input Power ............................................. 100W  
Impedance ..................................................................... 6Ω  
Frequency Response ............................... 70 Hz to 60 kHz  
....................................... AC 110-120/220-240V, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption ................................................. 70 W  
Standby Power Consumption ................................. 0.8 W  
Sensitivity  
<NX-430P>...............................................85 dB/2.83V/m  
<NX-C430> ..............................................86 dB/2.83V/m  
Dimensions (W x H x D) ..... 280 mm x 325 mm x 320 mm  
(11” x 12-13/16” x 12-5/8”)  
Dimensions (W x H x D)  
Weight ................................................ 9.2 kg (20 lbs. 4 oz.)  
<NX-430P>.......................... 87 mm x 184 mm x 147 mm  
(3-7/16” x 7-1/4” x 5-13/16”)  
<NX-C430> ......................... 273 mm x 81 mm x 147 mm  
(10-3/4” x 3-3/16”x 5-13/16”)  
* Specifications are subject to change without notice due to  
product improvements.  
Weight  
<NX-430P>...................................... 1.2 kg (2 lbs. 10 oz.)  
<NX-C430> ..................................... 1.7 kg (3 lbs. 12 oz.)  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.  
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY  
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE  
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND  
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN  
Printed in Indonesia  
WA31510-2  
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Weed Eater Yogurt Maker GA2010 User Manual
West Bend Microwave Oven 25 OZ THEATER STYLE User Manual
Whirlpool Washer 3363569 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer Whirlpool User Manual
White Rodgers Thermostat 1F58 User Manual
Windsor Vacuum Cleaner 10080170 User Manual
Xantrex Technology Universal Remote RC7 User Manual
Zanussi Cooktop ZEL 640 User Manual
Zanussi Range ZVT65X User Manual
Zanussi Ventilation Hood ZHC605 User Manual